Canon Copier Fy8 13Ex 000 Users Manual Ppre

FY8-13EX-000 to the manual ab817b7c-a77d-4ef4-a507-c3ae8fab7819

: Canon Canon-Copier-Fy8-13Ex-000-Users-Manual-240997 canon-copier-fy8-13ex-000-users-manual-240997 canon pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 389

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

SERVICE
MANUAL
REVISION 0

MAY 1997

FY8-13EX-000

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON)

IMPORTANT
THIS DOCUMENTATION IS PUBLISHED BY CANON INC., JAPAN, TO SERVE AS A SOURCE OF
REFERENCE FOR WORK IN THE FIELD.
SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN MAY VARY SLIGHTLY FROM
ACTUAL MACHINE VALUES OR THOSE FOUND IN ADVERTISING AND OTHER PRINTED MATTER.
ANY QUESTIONS REGARDING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN SHOULD BE DIRECTED TO
THE COPIER SERVICE DEPARTMENT OF THE SALES COMPANY.
THIS DOCUMENTATION IS INTENDED FOR ALL SALES AREAS, AND MAY CONTAIN
INFORMATION NOT APPLICABLE TO CERTAIN AREAS.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
Printed in Japan
Imprimé au Japon

Use of this manual should be strictly
supervised

to

avoid

disclosure

of

confidential information.

Prepared by
OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DEPT. 1
OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DIV.

CANON INC.
5-1, Hakusan 7-chome, Toride-shi, Ibaraki 302 Japan

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON)

INTRODUCTION
This Service Manual contains the bsic facts and figures about the plain paper copier
NP6218, and is compiled to serve as a handy reference for servicing the machine in the
field.
The NP6218 is designed to enable fully automated copying work and may be
configured with the following accessories:
1. Cassette Feeding Module-B2*
2. Cassette Feeding Module-A2*
3. Control Card IV N
4. ADF-E1
5. Staple Sorter B2/D1
6. MS-B1
7. Remote Diagnostic Device II
This manual is limited to the descriptions of the NP6218, Cassette Feeding ModuleB2/Cassette Feeding Module-A2.
* May not be available in some areas but discussed in this manual.
This Service Manual covers the copier only, and consists of the following chapters:
Chapter 1
General Description introduces the copier's features and specifications,
shows how to operate the copier, and explains how copies are made.
Chapter 2

Basic Operation provides outlines of the copier's various mechanical
workings.

Chapter 3

Exposure System discusses the principles of operation used for the
copier's lens drive unit and scanner drive unit. It also explains the timing
at which these drive units are operated, and shows how they may be
disassembled/assembled and adjusted.

Chapter 4

Image Formation System discusses the principles of how images are
formed. It also explains the timing at which the various units involved in
image formation are operated, and shows how they may be
disassembled/assembled and adjusted.

Chapter 5

Pick-Up/Feeding System explains the principles used from when copy
paper is picked up to when a copy is delivered in view of the functions of
electrical and mechanical units and in relation to their timing of operation.
It also shows how these units may be disassembled/assembled and
adjusted.

Chapter 6

Fixing System explains the principles used to fuse toner images to
transfer media in view of the functions of electrical and mechanical units
and in relation to their timing of operation. It also shows how these units
may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted.

Chapter 7

Externals/Auxiliary Mechanisms shows the copier's external parts, and
explains the principles used for the copier's various control mechanisms
in view of the functions of electrical and mechanical units and in relation
to their timing of operation. It also shows how these units may be
disassembled/assembled and adjusted.

Chapter 8

Installation introduces requirements for the site of installation, and shows
how the copier may be installed using step-by-step instructions.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON)

i

Chapter 9

Maintenance and Servicing provides tables of periodically replaced parts
and consumables/durables and scheduled servicing charts.

Chapter 10

Troubleshooting provides tables of maintenance/inspection,
standards/adjustments, and problem identification (image
fault/malfunction).

Appendix contains a general timing chart and general circuit diagrams.
In addition to the above chapters, this SERVICE MANUAL contains a set of
appendixes consisting of a general timing chart and general circuit diagrams.
A separate document entitled SERVICE HANDBOOK is also available for
troubleshooting problems in the copier.
The following rules apply throughout this volume:
1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the
relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with reference to the
timing of operation.
In the diagrams,
represents the path of mechanical drive—where a
signal name accompanies the symbol
, the arrow indicates the direction
of the electric signal.
The expression “turn on the power” means flipping on the power switch, closing the
front door, and closing the delivery unit door, which will result in supplying the
machine with power.
2. In the digital circuits, ‘1’ is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is
“High,” while ‘0’ is used to indicate “Low.” (The voltage value, however, differs from
circuit to circuit.)
In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be
checked in the field. Therefore, the operations of the microprocessors used in the
machines are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the
input of the DC controller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB to the
loads.
The contents of this manual may be updated from time to time to reflect improvements
rendered to the copier; a Service Information bulletin will be issued as necessary to
cover major changes.
All service persons are expected to be thoroughly familiar with the information
contained in this manual, SERVICE HANDBOOK, and Service Information bulletins, for
quick response to the user’s needs.

ii

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON)

System Configuration
The NP6218 may be configured with the following systems options:

ADF-E1
Sends originals one by one from
a stack set on its tray

Control Card IV N
Allows the user to control
copy volume.

Stapler Sorter B2/D1, MS-B1
Automatically sorts or (page collation)
or groups up to 10 sets of copies;
with the sorting function,
the sorted copies may
automatically be stapled.
(Not applicable to MS-B1.)

Cassette Feeding Module-B2
Adds an additional cassette.

Cassette Feeding Module-A2
Adds additional two cassettes.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON)

iii

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

iv

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV.0 MAR. 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON)

CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
I.
II.

III.

IV.

FEATURES .........................................1-1
SPECIFICATIONS ..............................1-2
A. Copier ............................................1-2
1. Type ..........................................1-2
2. System .....................................1-2
3. Features ...................................1-3
4. Others.......................................1-4
B. Cassette Feeding Module-B2/
Cassette Feeding Module-A2 ........1-5
NAMES OF PARTS ............................1-6
A. Exterior View .................................1-6
B. Cross Section ................................1-7
1. Body .........................................1-7
2. Cassette Feeding Module-A2...1-8
OPERATION .......................................1-9
A. Control Panel.................................1-9
B. Operation Mode.............................1-10
C. Making Two-Sided/Overlay
Copies (manual) ............................1-11
D. User Mode .....................................1-12
1. Outline ......................................1-12
2. Common Operations ................1-13
3. Changing the Auto Clear
Time (
) ..............................1-13

4. Changing the Auto Power-Off
Time (
) ..............................1-13
5. Zoom Fine-Adjustment (
)..1-14
6. Turning On and Off the Auto
Cassette Change Mechanism
(
) .......................................1-15
7. Turning On/Off the Auto Sort/
Non-Sort (with ADF and sorter
installed—option) (
) ..........1-16
8. Cleaning the Feeder (with ADF
installed—option) (
) ..........1-16
9. Selecting the Density
Adjustment Method for
Standard Mode (
) .............1-17
10.Initializing User Mode (
)....1-17
11.Quick Guide to User Mode.......1-18
E. Handling the Toner Bottle ..............1-19
V. WARNINGS AND ACTIONS ..............1-19
VI. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE BY THE
USER..................................................1-19
VII. IMAGE FORMATION ..........................1-20
A. Outline ...........................................1-20

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION
I.

BASIC CONSTRUCTION ...................2-1
A. Functional Construction.................2-1
B. Outline of the Electrical Circuitry...2-2
C. Basic Sequence of Operations
(2 copies continuous, AE) .............2-3
D. Main Motor Control Circuit.............2-4
1. Outline ......................................2-4
2. Mechanism ...............................2-4
E. Inputs to the DC Controller PCB ...2-5
1. Inputs to the DC Controller
PCB (1/3)..................................2-5
2. Inputs to the DC Controller
PCB (2/3)..................................2-6
3. Inputs to the DC Controller
PCB (3/3)..................................2-7
F. Outputs from the DC Controller
PCB ...............................................2-8
1. Outputs from the DC
Controller PCB (1/3) .................2-8

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

2. Outputs from the DC
Controller PCB (2/3) .................2-9
3. Outputs from the DC
Controller PCB (3/3) .................2-10
G. Inputs to and Outputs from the
1-Cassette Unit Driver PCB...........2-11
1. Inputs to and Outputs from
the 1-Cassette Unit Driver
PCB (1/1)..................................2-11
H. Inputs to and Outputs from the
2-Cassette Unit Driver PCB...........2-12
1. Inputs to and Outputs from
the 2-Cassette Unit Driver
PCB (1/2)..................................2-12
2. Inputs to and Outputs from
the 2-Cassette Unit Driver
PCB (2/2)..................................2-13

CANON NP6218 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON)

v

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
I.
II.

III.

BASIC OPERATION ...........................3-1
A. Varying the Reproduction Ratio ....3-1
LENS DRIVE SYSTEM ......................3-1
A. Outline ...........................................3-1
B. Lens Motor Drive Circuit................3-3
1. Keeping the Lens Motor
Stationary .................................3-3
2. Driving the Lens Motor .............3-3
C. Basic Sequence of Operations
(lens drive system; non-Direct) ......3-4
SCANNING DRIVE SYSTEM.............3-5
A. Driving the Scanner.......................3-5
1. Outline ......................................3-5
2. Relationship between the
Scanner Sensor and Signals....3-6
3. Basic Sequence of
Operations (scanner)................3-6
4. Driving the Scanner Motor .......3-7
5. Scanner Operations in Page
Separation Mode (non-AE,
page separation, A4, 2 copies)..3-8

IV.

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ......3-9
A. Scanner Drive Assembly ...............3-9
1. Detaching the Scanner Drive
Motor ........................................3-9
2. Detaching the Scanner Cable ..3-10
3. Assembling the Mirror
Position Tool .............................3-12
4. Routing the Scanner Cable ......3-13
5. Adjusting the Position of the
Mirrors (optical length of No.
1, 2, and 3 mirrors)...................3-16
6. Cleaning the Scanner No. 6
Mirror ........................................3-17
B. Lens Drive Assembly.....................3-18
1. Detaching the Lens Drive
Motor ........................................3-18
2. Routing the Lens Cable............3-20
3. Adjusting the Position of the
Change Solenoid......................3-21

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
I.

vi

PROCESSES .....................................4-1
A. Outline ...........................................4-1
B. Basic Sequence of Operations
(image formation system)..............4-3
C. Controlling the Scanning Lamp .....4-4
1. Outline ......................................4-4
2. Turning On and Off the
Scanning Lamp ........................4-5
3. Pre-Heating Control
(scanning lamp)........................4-5
4. Sequence of Operations
(scanning lamp pre-heating
control; AE, A4, continuous,
2 copies)...................................4-5
5. Controlling the Intensity of the
Scanning Lamp (FL1)...............4-7
6. Controlling the Fluorescent
Lamp Heater.............................4-8
7. Fluorescent Lamp Automatic ...4-9
8. Fluorescent Lamp Protection
Mechanism ...............................4-9
D. Controlling the Primary Charging
Roller Bias .....................................4-10
1. Outline ......................................4-10
2. Turning On and Off the Primary
Charging Roller Bias ................4-11

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

3. Controlling the Primary
Charging Roller Bias to a
Constant Voltage ......................4-11
4. Switching the Primary Charging
Roller Bias Application Voltage
Level .........................................4-11
5. Application Voltage Level
(APVC) for the Primary
Charging Roller and Scanning
Lamp On Voltage Level
Automatic Correction ................4-12
E. Controlling the Transfer Roller Bias...4-13
1. Outline ......................................4-13
2. Turning On and Off the
Transfer Roller Bias ..................4-15
3. Controlling the Transfer Bias
to a Constant Voltage ...............4-15
4. Controlling the Transfer Bias
Voltage Level Correction
(ATVC control) ..........................4-15
5. Current Limiter Circuit
(transfer bias) ...........................4-15
6. Current Limiter Circuit
(cleaning bias) ..........................4-15
F. Controlling the Static Eliminator
Bias................................................4-16

CANON NP6218 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON)

II.

1. Outline ......................................4-16
2. Switching the Static Eliminator
Bias Voltage Level ....................4-17
3. Ensuring Proper Separation of
Thin Paper ................................4-17
G. Controlling Blank Exposure ...........4-18
1. Outline ......................................4-18
2. Blanking (Whiting) of NonImage Areas for Reduction.......4-19
3. Blanking (Whiting) Out the
Leading/Trailing Edges and
between Copies........................4-19
H. Controlling the Primary Corona
Roller Cleaning Mechanism ..........4-20
1. Outline ......................................4-20
2. Primary Charging Roller
Cleaning Operation ..................4-20
I. Releasing the Transfer Roller ........4-21
1. Outline ......................................4-21
DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY AND
CLEANING ASSEMBLY .....................4-22
A. Outline ...........................................4-22
B. Controlling the Toner Level
Detection .......................................4-23
C. Controlling the Development
Bias................................................4-25
1. Outline ......................................4-25
2. Turning On and Off the DC
Component of the Developing
Bias and Controlling the
Voltage to a Constant Level .....4-25
3. Turning On and Off the AC
Component of the
Development Bias ....................4-26
4. Controlling the Voltage Level
of the DC Component of the
Development Bias ....................4-26
D. Automatic Control of Copy
Density...........................................4-27
1. Outline ......................................4-27
2. Control Method.........................4-27
3. AE Adjustment..........................4-29

III.

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ......4-30
A. Illumination Assembly....................4-30
1. Detaching the Scanning
Lamp/Fluorescent Lamp
Heater.......................................4-30
2. Points to Note When Attaching
the Fluorescent Lamp
Heater/Scanning Lamp.............4-32
3. Detaching the Blank Exposure
Assembly ..................................4-34
4. Detaching the Blank Exposure
Lamp ........................................4-35
5. Detaching the Blank Shutter
Solenoid ...................................4-36
6. Positioning the Blank Shutter
Solenoid ...................................4-37
7. Routing the Blanking Cable......4-38
8. Positioning the Left/Right
Margin ......................................4-38
B. Drum Unit ......................................4-39
1. Detaching the Drum Unit..........4-39
2. Cleaning ...................................4-40
C. Primary Corona Assembly.............4-41
1. Detaching the Primary Corona
Assembly ..................................4-41
2. Cleaning the Cleaning Pad and
the Primary Corona Roller .......4-42
3. Positioning the Solenoid for the
Primary Charging Roller...........4-43
D. Transfer Charging Assembly .........4-44
1. Detaching the Transfer Roller ...4-44
2. Attaching the Drum Heater.......4-44
E. Developing System........................4-47
1. Removing the Developing
Assembly ..................................4-47
2. Removing the Blade
Assembly ..................................4-47
3. Removing the Developing
Cylinder Side Seal....................4-48
4. Installing the Side Seal and
the Blade Assembly..................4-51

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
I.
II.

III.

PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM ............5-1
A. Outline ...........................................5-1
PICK-UP OPERATION (COPIER) ......5-3
A. Outline ...........................................5-3
B. Sequence of Operations (pick-up/
feeding assembly; A4, 2 copies)....5-4
PICK-UP FROM THE CASSETTE
FEEDING MODULE-A2......................5-5
A. Pick-Up Operation .........................5-5
B. Sequence of Operations
(cassette 2; A4, 2 copies) ..............5-6

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

IV.

V.
VI.

MULTIFEEDER...................................5-7
A. Outline ...........................................5-7
B. Identifying the Size of Paper on
the Multifeeder...............................5-8
C. Sequence of Operations
(multifeeder; A4, 2 copies).............5-9
IDENTIFYING THE CASSETTE
SIZE....................................................5-10
IDENTIFYING JAMS ..........................5-12
A. Pre-Registration Delay Jam...........5-12
B. Pre-Registration Timing Jam .........5-13

CANON NP6218 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON)

vii

C. Pre-Registration Stationary Jam ...5-13
D. Separation Delay Jam ...................5-14
E. Separation Stationary Jam ............5-14
F. Delivery Delay Jam........................5-15
G. Delivery Stationary Jam ................5-15
VII. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ......5-16
A. Pick-Up Assembly .........................5-16
1. Detaching the Pick-Up Roller
Unit ...........................................5-16
2. Detaching the Pick-Up Roller ...5-19
3. Points to Note When Attaching
the Pick-Up Roller ....................5-20
4. Detaching the Pick-Up Clutch...5-20
5. Detaching the Separation Pad ..5-21
6. Adjusting the Left/Right
Registration ..............................5-22
B. Multifeeder Assembly ....................5-23
1. Detaching the Multifeeder
Assembly ..................................5-23
2. Detaching the Multifeeder
Pick-Up Roller Unit ...................5-24
3. Detaching the Multifeeder
Pick-Up Roller ..........................5-25
4. Points to Keep Note When
Attaching the Multifeeder
Pick-Up Roller ..........................5-26
5. Detaching the Separation Pad ..5-26

6. Detaching the Multifeeder
Drive Unit..................................5-27
7. Detaching the Multifeeder
Clutch .......................................5-28
8. Positioning the Multifeeder
Assembly (paper guide plate
cam) .........................................5-29
9. Adjusting the Left/Right
Registration ..............................5-30
10.Points to Note When Attaching
the Multifeeder Assembly Rack
Plate .........................................5-30
C. Registration Roller Assembly ........5-31
1. Detaching the Registration
Clutch .......................................5-31
2. Detaching the Upper
Registration Roller....................5-31
3. Detaching the Lower
Registration Roller....................5-33
D. Feeding Assembly .........................5-34
1. Detaching the Feeding Belt ......5-34
E. Cassette Unit .................................5-36
1. Detaching the Copier from
the Cassette Unit......................5-36
2. Detaching/Attaching the
Pick-Up Roller ..........................5-36
3. Detaching the Pick-Up Clutch ..5-36

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
I.

II.

viii

BASIC OPERATIONS.........................6-1
A. Outline ...........................................6-1
B. Controlling the Fixing Heater
Temperature ..................................6-3
C. Controlling the Supply Power for
the Fixing Heater ...........................6-5
D. Detecting Overheating at the End
of the Fixing Heater .......................6-6
E. Protection Mechanism ...................6-6
1. Thermistor (TH1, TH2) .............6-6
2. Thermal Fuse (FU1).................6-6
3. Heater ON Detection Circuit
(230V model only) ....................6-6
F. Correcting Displacement of the
Fixing Film .....................................6-7
1. Outline ......................................6-7
2. Controlling the Fixing Film
Motor ........................................6-10
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ......6-11
A. Fixing Assembly ............................6-11
1. Construction1 ...........................6-11
2. Detaching the Upper Fixing
Unit ...........................................6-12

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

3. Detaching the Fixing Film,
Tension Roller, Drive Roller,
Fixing Cleaning Brush, and
Fixing Heater Unit ....................6-13
4. Points to Note When Attaching
the Fixing Film .........................6-20
5. Points to Note When Attaching
the Heater Connector ...............6-20
6. Points to Note When Replacing
the Fixing Upper Unit ...............6-21
7. Adjusting the Fixing Film Drive
Roller Pressure.........................6-21
8. Detaching the Lower Fixing
Unit ...........................................6-23
9. Detaching the Separation
Claw/Lower Fixing Claw and
Fixing Cleaning Roller ..............6-24
10.Adjusting the Lower Fixing
Roller Nip..................................6-25
B. Delivery Assembly .........................6-27

CANON NP6218 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
I.

II.

3. Routing the Drive Belt ..............7-13
E. Cassette unit .................................7-14
1. Detaching the Pick-Up Drive
Unit ...........................................7-14
2. Detaching the Cassette Motor..7-15
3. Detaching the Cassette Driver
PCB ..........................................7-16
F. DC Controller PCB ........................7-17
1. Detaching the DC Controller
PCB ..........................................7-17
2. Points to Note When
Replacing the DC Controller
PCB ..........................................7-17
G. Composite Power Supply PCB......7-18
1. Detaching the Composite
Power Supply PCB ...................7-18
2. Points to Note When Handling
the Composite Power Supply
PCB ..........................................7-20
H. AE Sensor PCB.............................7-21
1. Points to Note When
Replacing the AE Sensor .........7-21
I. Intensity Sensor PCB ....................7-21
1. Points to Note When Replacing
the Intensity Sensor .................7-21

POWER SUPPLY ...............................7-1
A. Outline ...........................................7-1
B. Power Supply Circuit Assembly.....7-2
C. Detecting Errors in the Power
Supply PCB ...................................7-4
1. Communication Error between
DC Controller PCB and
Composite Power Supply PCB ..7-4
2. Error in the High-Voltage
Output Data ..............................7-4
3. Low-Voltage Output Data Error..7-4
4. Overcurrent in the Low-voltage
Power Supply ...........................7-4
D. Protection Mechanisms for the
Power Supply Circuit .....................7-5
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ......7-6
A. External Covers .............................7-6
B. Control Panel.................................7-9
1. Detaching the Control Panel ....7-9
C. Fans...............................................7-10
1. Detaching the Exhaust Fan ......7-10
D. Main Motor/Main Drive Assembly..7-11
1. Detaching the Main Motor Unit..7-11
2. Detaching the Main Drive
Assembly ..................................7-11

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION
I.
II.

III.
IV.

SELECTING THE SITE ......................8-1
UNPACKING AND INSTALLING
THE COPIER......................................8-2
A. Unpacking and Removing Fixings ..8-2
B. Turning On the Copier ...................8-5
C. Checking the Images and
Operations .....................................8-8
D. Attaching the Drum Unit ................8-9
E. Changing the Cassette Size..........8-10
RELOCATING THE COPIER..............8-13
REPLACING THE DRUM UNIT..........8-14

V.

INSTALLING THE CONTROL CARD
IV N.....................................................8-17
VI. CASSETTE HEATER KIT 5
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ...........8-19
A. Unpacking......................................8-19
B. Installation (to a Cassette
Feeding Module-A2/B2).................8-20
VII. INSTALLING THE REMOTE
DIAGNOSTIC DEVICE II....................8-26
A. Unpacking......................................8-26
B. Installation to the Copier ...............8-27

CHAPTER 9 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
I.

II.

PERIODICALLY REPLACED
PARTS ................................................9-1
A. Periodically Replaced Parts...........9-1
DURABLES ........................................9-2
A. Copier ............................................9-2

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

III.
IV.
V.

B. Cassette Feeding Module-B2/
Cassette Feeding Module-A2 ........9-3
PERIODICAL SERVICING .................9-4
SERVICING CHART...........................9-5
NOTES ON DRUM KIT ......................9-6

CANON NP6218 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON)

ix

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING
I.

II.

x

MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION..10-3
A. Image Adjustment Basic
Procedure ....................................10-3
B. Periodical Servicing.....................10-4
STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS..10-5
A. Image Adjustment .......................10-5
1. Adjusting the Image Leading
Edge Margin ([3], No.305;
registration ON timing) ...........10-5
2. Adjusting the Leading Edge
Non-Image Width ([3], No.
306; blank shutter ON
timing).....................................10-6
3. Adjusting the Image Trailling
Edge Non-Image Width ([3],
No.309; blank shutter
timing).....................................10-7
4. Adjusting the Left/Right
Registration ............................10-8
5. Adjusting the Left/Right Margin
(No.311; left/right margin).......10-9
6. Adjusting the Scanning Lamp
Intensity ..................................10-10
7. AE Adjustment .......................10-11
B. Exposure System ........................10-15
1. Routing the Scanner Drive
Cable ......................................10-15
2. Adjusting the Mirror Position
optical distance between No.1
mirror and No.2/No.3 mirror) ..10-16
3. Adjusting the Scanner Cable
Tension ...................................10-17
4. Assembling the Mirror
Positioning Tool ......................10-17
5. Points to Note When Attaching
the Fluorescent Lamp Heater/
Scanning Lamp ......................10-18
6. Positioning the Change
Solenoid .................................10-20
C. Image Formation System ............10-21
1. Positioning the Blank Shutter
Solenoid .................................10-21
2. Routing the Blank Shutter
Cable ......................................10-22
3. Positioning the Solenoid for the
Primary Charging Roller.........10-22
4. After Replacing the Drum
Unit .........................................10-23
5. Attaching the Drum Heater ....10-23
D. Pick-Up/Feeding System .............10-25
1. Orientation of the Pick-Up
Roller ......................................10-25
2. Orientation of the Multifeeder
Pick-up Roller .........................10-25

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

III.

3. Positioning the paper Guide
Plate Cam (multifeeder) .........10-26
E. Fixing System..............................10-27
1. Points to Note when Attaching
the Fixing Film........................10-27
2. Points to Note when Attaching
the Heater Connector.............10-27
3. Adjusting the Fixing Film Drive
Roller Pressure ......................10-28
4. Points to Note after Replacing
the Fixing Upper Unit .............10-29
5. Adjusting the Nip ....................10-30
6. Routing the Drive Belt ............10-31
7. Storing the Fixing Heater
Registance .............................10-31
8. Setting the Fixing Heater
Temperature Control Value.....10-32
F. Electrical......................................10-35
1. After Replacing the PCB ........10-35
2. Clearing the Back-Up RAM ....10-35
3. Checking the
Photointerrupters....................10-36
4. Adjusting the Multifeeder
Paper width Sensor ................10-43
5. Setting the Paper Size for the
Universal Cassette .................10-44
TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE
FAULTS.............................................10-45
A. Initial Checks ...............................10-45
1. Site Environment ....................10-45
2. Checking the Originals ...........10-45
3. Checking the Copyboard
Cover and the Copyboard
Glass ......................................10-45
4. Checking the Paper................10-45
5. Others.....................................10-46
B. Samples of Image Faults.............10-48
C. Troubleshooting Faulty Images....10-49
1. The copy is too light
(half-tone only). ......................10-49
2. The copy is too light
(black solid also).....................10-50
3. The copy is too light
(overall, extremely). ................10-50
4. The copy has uneven density
(front too dark)........................10-52
5. The copy has uneven density
(front too light). .......................10-52
6. The copy is foggy (overall). ....10-53
7. The copy is foggy (vertical). ...10-54
8. The copy has black lines
(vertical; thick fuzzy lines). .....10-54
9. The copy has black lines
(vertical, fine)..........................10-54

CANON NP6218 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON)

IV.

10.The copy has white spot
(vertical)..................................10-55
11.The copy has white lines
(vertical)..................................10-55
12.The copy has white spots
(horizontal). ............................10-56
13.The back of the copy is
soiled. .....................................10-57
14.The copy has a fixing fault. ....10-58
15.The leading edge of the copy
is displaced. ...........................10-58
16.The leading edge of the copy
is displaced. ...........................10-58
17.The leading edge of the copy
is displaced. ...........................10-58
18.The copy has a blurred
image......................................10-59
19.The copy is foggy
(horizontal). ............................10-60
20.The copy has poor
sharpness...............................10-61
21.The copy is blank. ..................10-62
22.The copy is solid black. ..........10-62
TROUBLESHOOTING
MALFUNCTIONS .............................10-63
A. Troubleshooting Malfunctions ......10-63
1. E000 .......................................10-63
2. E001 .......................................10-64
3. E002, E003 ............................10-64
4. E004 .......................................10-65
5. E007 .......................................10-65
6. E010 .......................................10-66
7. E030 .......................................10-66
8. E064 .......................................10-67
9. E202 (keys on control panel
invalidated) .............................10-67
10.E210 .......................................10-68
11.E220 .......................................10-68
12.E240 .......................................10-68
13.E261 .......................................10-69
14.E710, E711, E712, E717 .......10-69
15.E803 .......................................10-69
16.AC power supply is absent.....10-70
17.DC power supply is absent. ...10-71
18.The blank shutter fails to
move.......................................10-72
19.The photosensitive drum fails
to rotate. .................................10-72
20.The pick-up operation fails
(from cassette). ......................10-73
21.The pick-up operation from
the multifeeder fails. ...............10-73
22.The scanner fails to move
forward/in reverse. ..................10-74
23.The registration roller fails to
rotate. .....................................10-74
24.The scanning lamp fails to
turn on. ...................................10-75

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

25.The lens fails to move. ...........10-75
26.The fixing heater fails to
operate. ..................................10-76
27.The pre-exposure lamp fails
to turn on. ...............................10-76
28.The add paper indicator fails
to turn off. ...............................10-76
29 The jam message fails to turn
off. ..........................................10-77
V. TROUBLESHOOTING FEEDING
PROBLEMS.....................................10-78
A. Jams (copy paper).......................10-78
1. Pick-Up Assembly ..................10-79
2. Separation/Feeding
Assembly................................10-80
3. Fixing/Delivery Assembly .......10-80
B. Feeding Faults.............................10-81
1. Double feeding .......................10-81
2. Wrinkling.................................10-81
VI. ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTIONS
OF THE ELECTRICAL PARTS.........10-82
A. Sensors .......................................10-82
B. Clutches, Solenoids, and
Switches ......................................10-84
C. Motors, Heaters, and Lamps .......10-86
D. PCBs ...........................................10-88
E. Cassette Feeding Module-A2......10-90
F. Variable Registors (VR) and
check Pins by PCB......................10-92
1. DC controller PCB..................10-92
2. Composite power supply
PCB ........................................10-93
VII. SERVICE MODE ..............................10-94
A. Outline .........................................10-94
B. Using Service Mode ....................10-94
1. Activating Service Mode.........10-94
2. Selecting a Service Mode ......10-95
3. Selecting Items.......................10-95
4. Using Adjustment Mode [3]
and Specification Mode [5].....10-95
5. Using Operation/Inspection
Mode [4] .................................10-95
6. Clearing Stored Error .............10-95
7. Recording on the Service
Mode Label ............................10-96
C. Control Display Mode [1] .............10-97
D. I/O Mode [2] ................................10-99
E. Adjustment Mode [3] ...................10-102
F. Operation/Inspection Mode [4] ....10-105
G. Specification Settings Mode [5]...10-107
H. Counter Mode [6] ........................10-108
VIII. SELF DIAGNOSIS............................10-109
A. Copier ..........................................10-109
B. Self Diagnosis (ADF)...................10-113
C. Self Diagnosis (Sorter) ................10-114

CANON NP6218 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON)

xi

APPENDIX
A.
B.
C.

xii

GENERAL TIMING CHART................A-1
SIGNALS AND ABBREVIATIONS......A-2
GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM .........A-3
not available

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

D.
E.

SPECIAL TOOLS................................A-5
SOLVENTS/OILS................................A-6

CANON NP6218 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This chapter introduces features and specifications, and explains how the machines are operated
and copies are made.

I.
II.

III.

IV.

FEATURES .........................................1-1
SPECIFICATIONS ..............................1-2
A. Copier ............................................1-2
B. Cassette Feeding Module-B2/
Cassette Feeding Module-A2 ........1-5
NAMES OF PARTS ............................1-6
A. Exterior View .................................1-6
B. Cross Section ................................1-7
OPERATION .......................................1-9
A. Control Panel.................................1-9

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

B. Operation Mode.............................1-10
C. Making Two-Sided/Overlay
Copies (manual) ............................1-11
D. User Mode .....................................1-12
E. Handling the Toner Bottle ..............1-19
V. WARNINGS AND ACTIONS...............1-19
VI. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE BY THE
USER..................................................1-19
VII. IMAGE FORMATION ..........................1-20
A. Outline ...........................................1-20

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

I. FEATURES
The copier becomes ready to make copies as soon as it is turned on. When fitted
with options, it provides a maximum of four paper sources.
1. Multiple front loading and multifeeder for space saving.
• The cassette may be slid out to the front for paper supply work.
• With the adjustable cassette and the multifeeder, various types of paper may be
used.
2. Office amenities and ecology.
• The copier is equipped with a heating mechanism, which makes the copier ready
for copying work at power-on without wait time.
• The copier is designed compact, enabling effective use of office space.
• The use of roller charging has proved to reduce the generation of ozone
significantly. (1/100 to 1/1000 compared to other Canon copiers)
• As the pick-up mechanism, center-reference is adopted in consideration of the use
of recycled paper.
• A significant number of parts are made of plastic in an effort to promote recycling.
• The copier is designed as a clamshell type to facilitate clearing of jammed paper.
3. Dependable high image quality.
• The new HQ (high-quality) toner ensures faithful reproduction of solid black, text,
and photos.
• In addition to Canon’s own single-component toner projection development
method, the use of auto image control (AIC) ensures stable reproduction of images.
4. Practical basic features.
• As many as 18 copies (A4, horizontal) may be made per minute.
• Copies may be as large as A3/Ledger or as small as A5/STMT, accommodating
postcards.
• The AE mechanism promises enhanced reproduction of newspapers or diazo
originals.
• Using page separation mode, a book may be copied with its left and right pages
processed separately.
• Copies may be made in zoom between 49% and 204%.
• The zoom fine-adjustment mechanism ensures better control for faithful
reproduction of originals.
• The auto power-off mechanism helps further saving of energy.
• The interrupt mechanism enables cutting in on a continuous copying session.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

1-1

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

II. SPECIFICATIONS
A. Copier
1. Type
Description

Item
Body

Desk top

Copyboard

Fixed

Light source

Fluorescent lamp

Lens

Zoom

Photosensitive
medium

OPC (ø30)

2. System
Description

Item
Copying

Indirect electrophotographic

Charging

Roller (direct charging)

Exposure

Slit (moving light source)

Copy density
adjustment

Automatic (AE) or manual

Development

Dry (toner projection)

Pick-up

Auto

1 cassette

Manual

Multifeeder

Transfer

Roller

Separation

Curvature + static eliminator

Cleaning

Cleaning blade

Fixing

Fixing (by plane-shaped heater; 1100 W max.)

1-2

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

3. Features
Specification

Item

Sheet, book, 3-D object (2 kg max.)

Maximum original
size

A3 (297 × 420 mm)/LDG (11" × 17")
Center reference

Reproduction ratio

Direct, 2R2E (Table 1-201)
Zoom 49% to 204%

Wait time

0 sec

First copy

8.2 sec or less (11.6 sec or less at power-on; A4, Direct, non-AE,
from cassette)

Continuous copying

100 (max.; upper limit may be varied in service mode)

Copying speed

See Table 1-202.

Copy size

Cassette: A3/11" × 17" to A5/STMT 3.94" × 5.88"
Manual: A3/11" × 17" to postcard (vertical)

Copy paper

Original type

Cassette

Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m2), tracing paper (SM1), colored paper,
recycled paper (64 to 80 g/m2), ecology paper (80 g/m2)

Manual

Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m2), tracing paper (SM1, GNT80), colored
paper, recycled paper (64 to 80 g/m2), ecology paper (80 g/m2),
transparency, postcard, label sheet, thick paper (81 to 128 g/m2)

Two-sided/
overlay

Manual

Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m2), colored paper, postcard, recycled paper
(64 to 880 g/m2), ecology paper (80 g/m2)

Cassette

34 mm deep (approx.; about 250 sheets of 80 g/,m2 paper),
clawless, front loading (center reference)

Multifeeder

5 mm high (max.; about 50 sheets of 80 g/m2), clawless (center
reference)

Copy tray

100 sheets (approx.; A3 size, 80 g/m2)

Non-image
width

One-sided

2.0 ±1.0 mm (leading edge), 2.5 ±1.5 mm (left/right, trailing edge)

Multi manual

2.0 ±1.0 mm (leading edge), 3.5 ±1.5 mm (left/right, trailing edge)

Auto clear

Available (2 min standard; may be varied between 1 to 9 min in 1minute increments; may be disabled)

Auto power-off

Available (5 min standard; may be varied in user mode to 2, 5, 10,
15, 30, 60, 120 min)

Option

Cassette Feeding Module-B2, Cassette Feeding Module-A2, Control
Card IV N, Stapler Sorter B2/D1, MS-B1 ADF-E1

Caution:
1. Use Canon-recommended paper.
2. Remove curling before feeding for a second time.
3. Fan out the transparencies before setting them on the multifeeder to prevent
adhesion.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

1-3

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

4. Others
Specifications

Item
Operating environment

Temperature

7.5°C to 32.5°C/45.5°F to 90.5°F

Humidity

5% RH to 85% RH

Atmospheric
pressure

810.6 hPa to 1013.3 hPa (0.8 to 1 atm)
Serial numbers

Power supply
Power consumption

Noise

230 V (50Hz)

UCDXXXXX

Maximum

1.5 kW or less

Standby

97.2 kJ per hr (27 wh average; reference only)

Continuous

2088 kJ (580 wh average; reference only)

Copying

49.7 dB or less (1 m front)

Standby

—

Sound power level by
ISO method

Ozone (average over 8 hr)

0.01 ppm or less (average); 0.02 ppm or less (max.)

Dimensions

Width

585 mm/23.0 in

Depth

622 mm/24.5 in

Height

345 mm/13.6 in
48 kg (approx.)

Weight
Consumables

Reproduction ratio

Copy paper

Keep wrapped to protect against humidity.

Cartridge

Avoid direct rays of the sun; keep at 40°C/104°F,
85% RH.

DIRECT

1: 1 (±0.5%)

REDUCE I

1: 0.500

REDUCE II

1: 0.707

ENLARGE I

1: 1.414

ENLARGE II

1: 2.000

ZOOM

49% to 204% (1% increments)

Table 1-201 Standard Reproduction Ratios

1-4

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Reproduction ratio
DIRECT

REDUCE

ENLARGE

Copy size

Copies/min

A3

(297 × 420)

10

A4

(210 × 297)

18

A5

(148 × 210)

21

A4R

(297 × 210)

14

A5R

(210 × 148)

18

1: 0.500 (+1.0%)

A3

→

A5R

20

1: 0.707 (+1.0%)

A3

→

A4R

12

A4

→

A5

12

1: 2.000 (+1.0%)

A5R

→

A3

11

1: 1.414 (+1.0%)

A4R

→

A3

10

A5

→

A4

19

1: 1 (±0.5%)

Table 1-202 Copying Speed
Specifications subject to change without notice.

B. Cassette Feeding Module-B2/Cassette Feeding Module-A2
Copy paper

As per copier.

Cassette

As per copier.

Power supply

34 V DC, 24V, 5V (from copier)

Dimensions

Cassette Feeding Module-B2: 585W × 622D × 105H (mm) /23.0in x 24.5in x 8.3in
Cassette Feeding Module-A2: 585W × 622D × 210H (mm) /23.0in x 24.5in x 4.1in

Weight

Cassette Feeding Module-B2: 9kg
Cassette Feeding Module-A2:16kg

Table 1-203

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

1-5

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

III. NAMES OF PARTS
A. Exterior View

q
w
e
r

t
y
u
i

Copyboard cover
Power switch
Clip tray
Multifeeder

Cassette
Front door
Control panel
Copyboard glass

Figure 1-301

q Open/close lever
w Copy density correction knob
e Static eliminator cleaner

r Heater switch
t Copy tray
y Static eliminator

Figure 1-302

1-6

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

B. Cross Section
1. Body

q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
!0

No. 3 mirror
No. 2 mirror
No. 1 mirror
Scanning lamp
Copyboard glass
Copyboard cover
Lens
Exhaust fan
Pre-exposure lamp
Primary charging roller

!1
!2
!3
!4
!5
!6
!7
!8
!9
@0

Reflecting plate
No. 6 mirror
Developing cylinder
Developing assembly
No. 5 mirror
No. 4 mirror
Multifeeder tray
Multifeeder pick-up roller
Cassette pick-up roller
Registration roller

@1
@2
@3
@4
@5
@6
@7
@8
@9
#0

Transfer roller
Separation static eliminator
Photosensitive drum
Feeding assembly
Cassette
Fixing film
Film tension roller
Film pressure roller
Film drive roller
Delivery roller

Figure 1-303

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

1-7

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

2. Cassette Feeding Module-A2

1

2

3

4

5

6

r Cassette 3 pick-up roller
t Drive roller
y Feeding roller

q Cassette 2
w Cassette 3
e Cassette 2 pick-up roller

Figure 1-304

1-8

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

IV. OPERATION
A. Control Panel
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
!0
!1

!2
!3
!4
!5
!6
!7
!8
!9
@0
@1
@2

Image Compose key
Page Separate key
Warning indicator
Display
% key
Reset key
Keypad
Power switch
Interrupt key
Clear key
Stop key

q

w

e

Max 200%
A4

A5

A4

A4

A5

Autom. Paper
A3
A4
A4 R
A5
A5 R

1:1

A

@0 !9 !8 !7

t

y

u

123

A3

1:1
A3 A4
Min 50%

@2 @1

r

Start key
Auto Ratio key
Zoom key
Paper Select key
Cassette/Jam indicator
Direct key
Reduce/Enlarge key
Copy density key
AE key
Sorter key
Sorter indicator

%

Autom. Zoom

– Zoom

!6

!5

!4

+

!3

!2

!1

i

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

C

0

!0

o

Figure 1-401

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

1-9

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

B. Operation Mode
Mode

Description

Image Composition Press to set/reset image composition mode.
mode
Page Separation
mode

Press to set/reset page separation mode.

Interrupt mode

Press to interrupt an ongoing copying
session.

Auto Ratio mode

Press it to set/reset auto ratio mode.

AE mode

Press to set/re-set AE mode or user mode.

Sort/staple
sort/group mode

Press it to select/reset sort, staple sort, or
group mode.

Remarks
Only when an ADF
(accessory) is installed.

Only when an ADF
(accessory) is installed.
Only when an sorter
(accessory) is installed.

Table 1-401

1-10

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

C. Making Two-Sided/Overlay Copies (manual)
You can make two-sided or overlay copies by manually feeding paper. You must,
however, keep the following in mind when making such copies:
q Be sure to orient the paper the same way for both sides when turning it over.
w Make sure that the paper has not absorbed moisture.
e Make sure that the paper has no curling.
r After copying on the first side, sufficiently cool the paper; then, correct any curling
before feeding it for a second time.
t Use paper of 60 to 128 g/m2.
y Correct any curling on postcards or thick paper (128 g/m2) before copying on the
second side.

Figure 1-405

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

1-11

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

D. User Mode
1. Outline
The copier provides user mode, which allows the user to change various settings or
to make various adjustments on his/her own; see Table 1-402.
Menu No. Display

Function

Description

Default settings

1

Changing the auto
clear time

You may set the auto clear time
between 1 and 9 min in 1-min
increments. Setting it to ‘0’
disables the function.

2 min

2

Changing the auto
power-off time

You can set the auto power-off
time to either 2, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60,
or 120 min.

5 min

3

Fine adjusting
(zoom)

You can correct a slight discrepancy between original and copy
sizes (direct); enlarge in X direction and reduce in Y direction
independent of each other.

± 0%

5

Turning on/off
auto sort/non-sort
(with ADF* and
sorter* installed)
*Accessory

You may specify whether to
evecute auto sort/non-sort.

On

6

Cleaning the feeder Use it to clean the pick-up
(with ADF* installed) assembly of the ADF.
Option

9

Selecting a density adjustment
method for
standard mode

You can specify either AE or
manual for density adjustment for
standard mode.

0

Initializing user
mode

You can return settings changed
in user mode to initial settings.

AE

Table 1-402

1-12

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

2. Common Operations
a. Keys to Use in User Mode
• Clear Key
Use it to return to the previous step; or, use it to clear a setting entered by mistake
when making mode settings.
• Start Key
Use it to accept a selected item when making user mode settings.
• AE Key
Use it to return to copy mode when making user mode settings.
b. Operation
1) Hold down the AE key for about 4 sec or more.
• This will turn on the display, indicating “
”.
2) Enter the menu number of each function using the keypad.
3) Press the Start key.
• The current setting of the respective function appears.
4) Enter a new setting using the appropriate key.
5) Press the start key.
• The copy count/ratio indictor turns on to indicate the user mode being changed.
• The setting of the respective user mode is changed.
6) Press the AE key.
• The copier returns to standby state.
3. Changing the Auto Clear Time (
)
1) Hold down the AE key for 4 sec or more.
•“
” appears on the display.
2) Press the Start key.
• The display indicates the current setting (if initial, indicates ‘1-2’).
3) Enter a desired setting using the keypad.
• The display indicates the new setting (if 5 min, indicates ‘1-5’).
4) Press the Start key. “
”
5) Press the AE key.
• The copier returns to standby state.
4. Changing the Auto Power-Off Time (
)
1) Hold down the AE key for 4 sec or more.
•“
” appears on the display.
2) Enter ‘2’ using the keypad so that the display indicates “
”.
3) Press the Start key.
• The display indicates the current setting (if initial, indicates ‘2-2’).
4) Enter a desired setting using the keypad.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

1-13

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Auto power-off time (min)

Settings

2

2-1

5

2-2

10

2-3

15

2-4

30

2-5

60

2-6

120

2-7

Table 1-403
• The display indicates the new setting (if 10 min, indicates ‘2-3’).
5) Press the Start key.
• The auto power-off time is changed, and the display returns to “
6) Press the AE key.
• The copier returns to standby state.

”.

Reference:
If you want to disable the auto power-off function, use service mode (See p. 10-109.).

5. Zoom Fine-Adjustment (
)
1) Hold down the AE key for 4 sec or more.
• The display indicates “
”.
2) Enter ‘3’ using the keypad so that the display indicates “
”.
3) Press the Start key.
• The display indicates ‘3-1’ suggesting the direction of adjustment.
Direction of adjustment

Display

X direction (horizontal)

3-1

Y direction (vertical)

3-2

Table 1-404
Further, the copy density indicator shows the current setting. (See Figure 1-406.)
4) Press the copy density key to adjust the reproduction ratio in X direction. (See Figure
1-406.)
5) Press the Start key.
• The reproduction ratio in X direction is fine-adjusted, and the display indicates ‘32’.
Further, the copy density indicator shows the current setting. (See Figure 1-406.)
6) Press the Density key to adjust the reproduction ratio in Y direction. (See Figure 1406.)

1-14

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

7) Press the Start key.
• The zoom reproduction is fine-adjusted, and the display returns to “
8) Press the AE key.
• The copier returns to standby state.

”.

The fine-adjustment reproduction ratios as shown in the copy density display are as
follows:
■ Zoom Fine-Adjustment (Reduce)
Press the Lighter key.

■ Zoom Fine-Adjustment (Enlarge)
Press the Darker key.

Initial setting
(±0%)

Initial setting
(±0%)

-0.2%

+0.2%

-0.4%

+0.4%

-0.6%

+0.6%

-0.8%

+0.8%

-1.0%

+1.0%

Figure 1-402
6. Turning On and Off the Auto Cassette Change Mechanism (
1) Hold down the AE key for 4 sec or more.
• The display indicates “
”.
2) Enter r using the keypad so that the display indicates “
”.
3) Press the Start key.
• The display indicates the current setting (if initial setting, ‘4-1’).
State of auto cassette change function

Settings

On

4-1

Off

4-0

)

Table 1-405

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

1-15

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

4) Enter q or p using the keypad to specify ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
• The display indicates the new setting (if Off, ‘4-0’.)
5) Press the Start key.
• The auto cassette change function is turned on or off, and the display returns to
“
”.
6) Press the AE key.
• The copier returns to standby state.
7. Turning On/Off the Auto Sort/Non-Sort (with ADF and sorter installed—option)
(
)
1) Hold down the AE key for 4 sec or more.
• The display indicates “
”.
2) Enter t using the keypad so that the display indicates “
”.
3) Press the Start key.
The display indicates the current setting (if initial settings, ‘5-1’).
Turning on/off the auto cassette change mechanism

Settings

On

5-1

Off

5-0

Table 1-406
4) Enter q or p using the keypad to select On or Off.
• The display indicates the new setting (if Off, ‘5-0’).
5) Press the Start key.
• The auto cassette change will be either On or Off, and the display returns to
“
”.
6) Press the AE key.
• The copier returns to standby state.
8. Cleaning the Feeder (with ADF installed—option) (
)
1) Hold down the AE key for 4 sec or more.
• The display indicates “
”.
2) Enter y using the keypad so that the display indicates “
”.
3) Place about 10 sheets of blank copy paper (white) on the ADF’s original tray.
4) Press the Start key.
• Feeder cleaning starts; to stop, press the Stop key.
During the cleaning operation, “
” on the display flashes; then, “
” stops
flashing and remains on.
5) Press the AE key.
• The copier returns to standby state.

1-16

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

9. Selecting the Density Adjustment Method for Standard Mode (
1) Hold down the AE key for 4 sec or more.
• The display indicates “
”.
2) Enter o using the keypad so that the display indicates “
”.
3) Press the Start key.
• The display indicates ‘9-1’.
Selecting the density adjustment method for standard mode

)

Settings

AE (automatic)

9-1

Manual

9-0

Table 1-407
4) Enter q or p using the keypad to select AE or manual so that the display indicates
the new specification (if manual, indicates ‘9-0’).
5) Press the Start key.
• The new specification is stored, and the display returns to “
”.
6) Press the AE key.
• The copier returns to standby state.
10. Initializing User Mode (
)
1) Hold down the AE key for 4 sec or more.
• The display indicates “
”.
2) Enter p using the keypad so that the display indicates “
3) Press the Start key.
• The display indicates ‘0-1’.
4) Enter p using the keypad.
• The display indicates “
”.
5) Press the Start key.
• User mode is initialized, and the display returns to “
6) Press the AE key.
• The copier returns to standby state.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

”.

”.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

1-17

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

11. Quick Guide to User Mode

Table 1-408

1-18

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

E. Handling the Toner Bottle
Instruct the user to dispose of any empty toner bottle as nonflamable material.
! Caution:

Do not dispose of the toner bottle into fire.
It may explode.

V. WARNINGS AND ACTIONS
• Handling the Toner Bottle
Instruct the user to dispose of any empty toner bottle as nonflammable material.
! Caution:

Do NOT throw the cartridges into fire; it can burst or explode.

VI. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE BY THE USER
Make sure that the user cleans the following parts once a week:
q Copyboard Glass
Use a cloth moistened with water or mild detergent solution; then, dry wipe it.
w Copyboard Cover
Use a cloth moistened with water or mild detergent solution; then, dry wipe it.
e Static Eliminator
If separation jams occur frequently, use the special brush (accessory) to clean it; the
eliminator need not be cleaned as often as once a week.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

1-19

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

VII. IMAGE FORMATION
A. Outline

Copyboard glass

Scanning lamp
Lens

Primary corona roller
Pre-exposure lamp
Fixing film
Developing cylinder

Cleaning assembly

Pick-up
(multifeeder)

Transfer roller
Static eliminator
Pressure roller

Pick-up
(cassette)

Figure 1-601
The copier uses an electrostatographic method to produce images and is
constructed as shown in Figure 1-601.
It is equipped with an automatic control mechanism to ensure stable reproduction of
high-quality images.

1-20

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The NP6218 generates images in the following eight steps.
Step 1. Pre-exposure
Step 2. Primary charging
Step 3. Image exposure
Step 4. Development (AC + positive DC)
Step 5. Transfer (positive DC)
Step 6. Seperation (AC + positive DC)
Step 7. Fixing
Step 8. Drum cleaning

Static latent image formation block

3. Image exposure

2. Primary charging

4. Development

1. Pre-exposure

8. Drum Cleaning

Delivery

5. Transfer

6. Separation

Manual feeding
Registration

Cassette

7. Fixing

flow of copy paper
rotation of drum

Figure 1-602

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

1-21

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1-22

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY. 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 2
BASIC OPERATION
This chapter provides outlines of the copier’s various operational workings. (Note that a single
rotation of the drum takes about 0.29 sec.)

I.

BASIC CONSTRUCTION ...................2-1
A. Functional Construction.................2-1
B. Outline of the Electrical Circuitry...2-2
C. Basic Sequence of Operations
(2 copies continuous, AE) .............2-3
D. Main Motor Control Circuit.............2-4
E. Inputs to the DC Controller PCB ...2-5

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

F. Outputs from the DC Controller
PCB ...............................................2-8
G. Inputs to and Outputs from the
1-Cassette Unit Driver PCB...........2-11
H. Inputs to and Outputs from the
2-Cassette Unit Driver PCB...........2-12

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

I. BASIC CONSTRUCTION
A. Functional Construction
The copier may be divided into four blocks; namely, the pick-up/feeding system,
exposure system, image formation system, and control system.
Control system
Control
assembly

Control circuit
assembly

Scaning lamp
assembly

Optical
path

Image formation
system

Primary
charging

Drum
cleaning
assembly

Tray

Fixing
assembly

Exposure system

Copyboard

Photosensitive
drum

Separation

Developing
assembly

Transfer
Pick-up
control
assembly

Feeding
assembly

Pick-up/feeding
system 1

Pick-up/feeding
system 2

Manual feed
assembly

Cassette 1

Cassette Feeding
module B2
Cassette Feeding
module A2

Flow of high voltage/toner
Flow of paper
Flow of light
Flow of electrical signals

Figure 2-101

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

2-1

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

B. Outline of the Electrical Circuitry
The copier’s principal electrical mechanisms are controlled by the microprocessor on
the DC controller PCB. The microprocessor reads the input signals from the sensors and
operation keys according to the stored program and generates signals used to drive such
loads as motors, solenoids, and lamps.
The microprocessor is capable of reading both digital and analog signals because of
its built-in A/D converter.
DC controller PCB

Composite power supply
Options
power
supply

+5V
+24V
+34V

Q301
CPU

ADF (accessory)
Sorter (accessory)

CPU
Scanning lamp
heater switch

Sensor
Toner level
detection PCB

Highvoltage
circuit

Q305
ROM

Bias PCB

AE sensor PCB

HV
Q307
RAM

Main thermistor
Sub thermistor

M1

LA

Control panel

Q314

Developing
cylinder
Transfer current
Static eliminator
Primary crrent

Main motor

Pre-exposure lamp

Motor

Scanning motor
Lens motor
Fixing film moor

Fan

Heat exhaust fan

(for IPC
communication)

Power switch
SL
(accessory)

Control card (accessory)
CL

Change solenoid
Multifeeder holding plate
solenoid
Blank shutter solenoid
Primary charging roller
Creaning solenoid
Transfer charging roller
reversting solenoid
Registration clutch
Delivery clutch
Multifeeder pick-up clutch

(accessory)
Motor
Sensor

Cassette unit motor

Cassette Driver PCB
CL

Cassette pick-up clutch

Figure 2-102

2-2

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

C. Basic Sequence of Operations (2 copies continuous, AE)
Power switch
ON

Copy Start key
ON

STBY

INTR

SCFW

SCRV

SCFW

SCRV LSTR STBY

AER
Main motor (M1)
Fixing heater
Primary charging bias
Transfer bias
Static eliminator bias

,




,,










,





,,



,,
,,


,
1.5sec

Scanning lamp
Scanner
Developing AC bias
Developing DC bias

Figure 2-103
Period

Description

STBY (standby)

• Between when LSTR is over and
when the Copy Start key is
pressed or the Power switch is
pressed.
• Between when the Power switch
has been pressed and when the
Copy Start key is pressed.

Until the Copy Start key
or another operation key
is pressed.

INTR
(initial rotation)

For at least 1 sec after the Copy
Start key has been pressed.

The drum sensitivity is
stabilized in preparation
for a copy run.

AER
(AE rotation)

The scanner is moved
about 65 mm forward and
in reverse to measure the
density of the original.

SCFW
(scanner forward)

While the scanner is moving forward.
• The distance of forward travel
varies depending on the cassette
size and reproduction ratio.
• The distance of reverse travel
varies depending on the selected
reproduction ratio.

The scanning lamp illuminates the original, and the
reflected optical image is
projected on the photosensitive drum through
mirrors and lenses.

SCRV
(scanner reverse)

While the scanner is moving in
reverse.

The scanner is returned
to the home position in
preparation for the next
copy run.

LSTR
(last rotation)

Between when SCRV is over and
The surface of the photowhen the copy paper moves past the sensitive drum is cleaned
delivery sensor.
using static electricity as
post treatment.

Remarks
• Upon completion of
LSTR, the indications on
the control panel return
to indications for standard mode after 2 min.

AE mode only.

The registration signal is
generated to move the
copy paper to the transfer
assembly.
The last copy is
discharged.

Table 2-101

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

2-3

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

D. Main Motor Control Circuit
1. Outline
Figure 2-104 shows the circuit used to control the main motor (M1); the circuit has
the following functions:
q turns on and off the main motor.
w controls the main motor to a specific rotation speed.
The main motor (M1) is a DC motor that has a built-in clock pulse generator. When
the motor rotates, it generates clock pulse signals (MMCLK*) according to the revolution
of the motor. The speed control circuit matches the phases of the frequency of these
clock pulses and that of the reference signals to control the main motor (M1) to a specific
revolution speed.
2. Mechanism
When the main motor drive signal (MMD) from the DC controller circuit goes ‘1’, the
drive circuit of the motor driver turns on, thereby rotating the main motor (M1) at a
constant speed.
While the main motor is rotating at a specific speed, the motor driver PCB keeps
sending the specific speed state signal=0 (MLOCK*) to the DC controller PCB. If, for
some reason, an irregularity occurs in the rotation of the main motor, the MLOCK* signal
goes ‘1’.
If the main motor drive signal (MMD) remains ‘1’ and the MLOCK*=0 remains
unchanged for about 1 sec, the DC controller identifies a main motor error and stops the
main motor and, at the same time, indicates ‘E010’.
J 206 +34V J 501
-1
-2
J 303
-3

MMD

J 502
-2
Clock pulse generator

DC controller
PCB

Drive circuit

J 303
-4

MLOCK*

Drive
current

J 502
-1
Phase control
circuit

M1

Main motor
Hall IC output
MMCLK

Reference signal

Main motor driver PCB

Figure 2-104

2-4

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

E. Inputs to the DC Controller PCB
1. Inputs to the DC Controller PCB (1/3)
DC controller PCB

Scanner home
position sensor

PS 1

5V
J311
-3
-2 SCHP
-1

J307
-3
Lens home position
sensor

PS 2

-2
-1

J315
-3
Blank shutter home
position sensor

Multifeeder paper
sensor

Cassette paper
sensor

Registration
sensor

PS 3

PS 4

PS 5

PS 6

-2
-1

J313
-7
-9
-8

J313
-1
-3
-2
J314
-3
-2
-1

J314
-4
Separation
sensor

Delivery sensor

Fixing film sensor

Right door open/
closed sensor

-6
PS 7

-5
J312
-3
-2

PS 8

PS 9

PS 10

-1

J304
-13
-12
-11

J306
-13
-15
-14

When scanner is at home position, '1'.
(when light-blocking plate is at PS1, '1')

5V
LHP

When lens detects home position sensor, '1'.
(when light-blocking plate is at PS2, '1')

5V
BSHP

When blank home position sensor detects
the blank shutter, '1'.
(when light-blocking plate is at PS3, '1')

5V
CPD*

When paper is present in multifeeder, '0'.
(when light-blocking plate is not at PS4, '0')

5V
MFPD*

When paper is present in cassette, '0'.
(when light-blocking plate is not at PS5, '0')

5V
RPD

When PS6 detects paper, '1'.
(when light-blocking-plate is at PS6, '1')

5V
SPD*

When PS7 detects paper, '0'.
(when light-blocking plate is not at PS 7, '0')

5V
DPD*

When PS8 does not detect paper, '0'.
(when light-blocking plate is not at PS8, '0')

5V
FFD

When PS9 detects film, '0'.
(when light-blocking plate is at PS9, '1')

5V
RDOP*

When right door is opened, '0'.
(when light-blocking plate is not at PS10, '0')

Figure 2-105

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

2-5

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

2. Inputs to the DC Controller PCB (2/3)
DC controller PCB
J601
-1
-2
-3
-4

AE sensor

J307
-7
-6
-5
-4

J604-2
-1

Light adjusting
sensor

Cassette size
sensor

Control panel

J356-1
-2

J701
-2
-4
-3
-1

J317
-3
-5
-4
-2

J651
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1

J314
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12

J801
J802

+24V

AE
AEREF
See p. 4-27.
AEVR1
AEVR2
+24V
+5V
See p. 4-4.
L1D

CS
CSZ_1
CSZ_2
CSZ_3
CSZ_4

J309
J310

On the control panel PCB, keys and
LEDs are arranged in a matrix; and
the DC controller turns on the LEDs or
reads key input. The main switch is
part of the control panel. (p. 7-2)

SW829
Main switch

Multifeeder paper
width detection

J313
-4
-5
-6

VR1

J304
-3
Main thermistor
(TH1)

See p. 5-8.

MFPWD

Detects the width of copy paper
loaded in the multifeeder.

TH1

-4
J304
-1

Sub thermistor
(TH2)

See p. 6-1.
TH2

-2

Figure 2-106

2-6

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

3. Inputs to the DC Controller PCB (3/3)

Figure 2-107

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

2-7

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

F. Outputs from the DC Controller PCB
1. Outputs from the DC Controller PCB (1/3)
DC controller PCB

Door switch

HTRD

A

See p. 6-1.

Cassette heater (H4)
When '0', RL102 turns on

Cassette heater (H5)

Composite power
BP102 BP103 BP101 supply PCB
+5V
Anti-condensation
switch (SW1)

RL102
EHTRL* When '0' RL102 turns on.
When L102 turns on,
SW1 turns on,
and heater (R1) turn on.

Lens heater (R1)

25V
RL101

Fuse (FU1)
Fixing heater
(H1)
A

Heater
ON
Fixing detection
heater PCB
driver

PWSW* When '0', RL101
turns on.
(on when power is turned on)
+5V

B

B

HTON*

When heater is on, '0'.

Thermal
control
circuit

Fluorescent lamp heater
switch (SW2)
Fluorescent lamp heater
(H2)

Q512

Fluorescent lamp
(FL1)

Scanning
lamp control
circuit

Primary charging roller
Developing cylinder
Transfer roller
Static eliminator

High-voltage
circuit

Toner level
detection
sensor

Communication with composite
power supply PCB.
Microprocessor

+24V
TEP*

When '0',cartridge
indicator turns on.

Figure 2-108

2-8

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

2. Outputs from the DC Controller PCB (2/3)
DC controller PCB

Registration
clutch

Pick-up clutch

Multifeeder
pick-up clutch

+24V
J303
-6
-5 RGCLD*
+24V
J303
-8
-7 PUCLD1*

CL1

CL2

SL1

Multifeeder
holding plate
solenoid

SL2

Blank shutter
solenoid

SL3

Primary charging
roller cleaning
solenoid

SL4

Transfer charging
roller releasing
solenoid

SL5

Main motor

When '0', pick-up clutch turns on.
(pick-up roller rotates)

+24V
J306
-9
-10 MFPUCLD* When '0', multifeeder pick-up
clutch turns on.
(multifeeder pick-up roller rotates)
+24V
J306
When '1', solenoid turns off.
-7
(blank width control)
-8 CHSLD*
When '0', solenoid turns on.
+24V
(lens mount moves)
J306
-11
When '0', solenoid turns on.
-12 MFSLD*
(holding plate released)
+24V
J315
-4
When '0', solenoid turns on.
-5 BSSLD*
(blank shutter opens)
+24V
J308
-9
When '0', solenoid turns on.
-10 PCLSLD*
(cleaning pad butted)
+24V
J313
When '0', solenoid turns on.
-10
(causing transfer roller
-11
TRSLD*
to move down)

CL3

Change
solenoid

When '0', registration clutch turns on.
(registration roller rotates)

J501
-1
-2

M1

Main motor
drive PCB

J502
-4
-1
-2
-3

J206
-1
-2

+34V

+5V
J03
-1
-4
MLOCK*
-3
MMD
-2

See p. 5-1.

J305
Scanner motor

M2

See p. 3-7.
J306

Lens motor

M3

See p. 3-3.
J304

Fixing film motor

See p. 6-10.

M4

Figure 2-109

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

2-9

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

3. Outputs from the DC Controller PCB (3/3)

DC controller PCB

+24V
J316
-1

Heat exhaust fan
(FM1)

-2

J401
-1

HEFD*

When '0', heat exhaust fan on.
(heat exhaust fan rotates)

+24V

J315
-7

Pre-exposure
lamp

When '0', the pre-exposure lamp
turns on.
-2

-6

PEXP*
+24V

J320
-1
Total copy count

-2

When changes from '0' to '1',
count is incremented.
TCNTD*
+5V

Control
card
IV N

J803
-2
-4
-3
-1

Control
panel

J802
-13
-16
-15
-14

J310
-4
-1
-2
-3

CCD*
CCDT*

When '0', count is incremented.
When '0', control card is present.

Figure 2-110

2-10

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

G. Inputs to and Outputs from the 1-Cassette Unit Driver PCB
1. Inputs to and Outputs from the 1-Cassette Unit Driver PCB (1/1)
DC controller PCB
Cassette driver PCB

5V

J110
-1
Cassette 2
vertical path
sensor

-3
PS1cu

C2VPD

-2

When PS1 detects paper, '1'.
(when the light-blocking plate
is at PS1cu, '1')

5V
J110
-4
Cassette 2
paper sensor

-6
PS2cu

-5

J651
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1

Cassette 2
size detection

C2PD

J110
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12

When paper is present in
cassette, '0'.
(when light-blocking plate
is not at PS2cu, '0')

CS2
C2SZ_1
C2SZ_2
C2SZ_3
C2SZ_4

See p. 5-8.

+24V
Cassette 2
pick-up clutch

Cassette
unit motor

CL1cu

M1cu

J115
-1
-2

When '0', pick-up clutch turns on.
C2PUCLD* (pick-up roller rotates)

J114
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6

+24V
CMA
CMA*

+24V

While M1cu is rotating,
alternates between '1' and
'0'. (pulse signal)

CMB
CMB*

Figure 2-111

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

2-11

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

H. Inputs to and Outputs from the 2-Cassette Unit Driver PCB
1. Inputs to and Outputs from the 2-Cassette Unit Driver PCB (1/2)
DC controller PCB
Cassette driver PCB
Cassette 2
vertical path
sensor

Cassette 2
sensor

Cassette 3
vertical path
sensor

Cassette 3
paper sensor

Cassette right
door
open/closed
sensor

Cassette 2 size
detection

Cassette 3 size
detection

5V

J110
-1
-3
-2

PS1cu

When PS1cu detects paper, '1'.
C2UPD (when light-blocking plate is at
PS1cu, '1')
5V

J110
-4
-6
-5

PS2cu

PS3cu

J120
-13
-15
-14

PS4cu

J120
-10
-12
-11

When paper is present in cassette, '0'.
CS2PD* (when light-blocking plate is not at
PS2cu, '0')
5V

C3VPD

5V
When paper is present in cassette, '0'.
CS3PD* (when light-blocking pale
is not at PS4cu, '0')
5V

J120
-1
-3
-2

PS5cu
J651
-6

J110
-7

-5

-8

-4

-9

-3

-10

-2

-11

-1

-12

J651
-6

J120
-4

-5

-5

-4

-6

-3

-7

-2

-8

-1

-9

When PS3cu detects paper, '1'.
(when light-blocking plate is at PS3cu, '1')

When right door is opens, '0'.
CRDOP* (when light-blocking plate
is not at PScu, '0')

CS2
C2SZ_1
C2SZ_2
C2SZ_3
C2SZ_4

CS3
C3SZ_1
C3SZ_2
C3SZ_3
C3SZ_4

See p. 5-8.

See p. 5-8.

Figure 2-112

2-12

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

2. Inputs to and Outputs from the 2-Cassette Unit Driver PCB (2/2)
Cassette driver PCB

DC controller PCB
+24V

Cassette 2
CL1cu
pick-up clutch

J125
-1
-2

Cassette 3
CL2cu
pick-up clutch

J125
-3
-4

When '0', pick-up clutch turns on.
C2PUCLD* (pick-up roller rotates)
+24V

Cassette
unit motor

M1cu

When '0', the pick-up clutch turns on.
C4PUCLD* (pick-up roller rotates)

J114
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6

+24V
CMA
CMA*

+24V

While M1cu is rotating,
alternates between '1' and '0'.
(pulse signal)

CMB
CMB*

Figure 2-113

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

2-13

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

2-14

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAR. 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3
EXPOSURE SYSTEM
This chapter discusses the principles of operation used for the copier’s lens drive unit and scanner
drive unit. It also explains the timing at which these drive units are operated, and shows how they may
be disassembled/assembled and adjusted.

I.
II.

BASIC OPERATION ...........................3-1
A. Varying the Reproduction Ratio ....3-1
LENS DRIVE SYSTEM ......................3-1
A. Outline ...........................................3-1
B. Lens Motor Drive Circuit................3-3
C. Basic Sequence of Operations
(lens drive system; non-Direct)......3-4

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

III.
IV.

SCANNING DRIVE SYSTEM.............3-5
A. Driving the Scanner.......................3-5
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ......3-9
A. Scanner Drive Assembly ...............3-9
B. Lens Drive Assembly.....................3-18

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

I. BASIC OPERATION
A. Varying the Reproduction Ratio
The reproduction ratio across the photosensitive drum is varied by the lens drive
system; on the other hand, the ratio around the drum is varied by the scanner drive
system.
The lens drive system uses a zoom lens; as shown in Figure 3-101, the position and
focal distance of the lens are changed to vary the reproduction ratio across the
photosensitive drum.
The scanner drive system varies the reproduction ratio around the photosensitive
drum by moving the No. 1 mirror relatively faster (reduction) or slower (enlargement) than
the peripheral speed of the photosensitive drum.
Direct

F'
F

Reduce

F1'
F1

Enlarge

F2'
F2

Figure 3-101

II. LENS DRIVE SYSTEM
A. Outline
The lens drive system is driven by the lens motor (M3). The drive of the lens motor
is transmitted to the blank exposure unit through a relay gear. (See p. 4-18.)
When the lens is moved, the solenoid (SL1) is turned on to engage the relay gear
with the lens gear; when the lens motor rotates in the direction of the arrow in this
condition, the lens is moved in the direction of enlargement (←) by the work of the relay
lens gear and lens cable.
The blank exposure shutter, on the other hand, moves according to the distance
traveled by the lens for reduction, thereby blanking (whiting) out the areas on both ends
of the copy.
The copier’s scanner lens home position sensor (PS2) is located at the center of the
scanner lens drive rail so that the scanner lens home position may be detected early
upon power-on, thereby speeding up the generation of the first copy. In addition, the
scanning lens moves to the appropriate position in response to a press on each ratio
button, thereby shortening the time it takes to generate the first copy.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

3-1

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

Lens motor (M3)

Relay gear

Change solenoid (SL1)

SL1 'ON'
(lens drive)
SL1 'OFF'
(blank exposure
unit drive)

Change solenoid (SL1)

Lens motor (M3)

Relay gear

Lens cable
Lens gear

Lens

Enlargement

Lens home position
detection signal (LHP)

Lens motor drive signal

Cam groove

Change solenoid drive signal (CHSLD*)

Lens home
position sensor
(PS2)

DC controller

Figure 3-201

3-2

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

B. Lens Motor Drive Circuit
The lens motor (M3) is a stepping motor and rotates in response to drive power
LNSC-A and LNSC-B and pulse signals LNSA, LNSA*, LNSB, and LNSB*.
1. Keeping the Lens Motor Stationary
All LNSA, LNSA*, LNSB, and LNSB* are caused to go OFF, thereby stopping and
retaining the motor stationary.
2. Driving the Lens Motor
Pulses are applied to each phase in sequence to rotate the motor.
DC controller PCB

34V

Microprocessor
(Q301)

J306
-1

LNSC-B

-4

LNSC-A

-5

LNSA

-6

LNSA*

-2

LNSB

M3
-3

LNSB*

Lens motor

Figure 3-202

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

3-3

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

C. Basic Sequence of Operations (lens drive system; non-Direct)
When a specific reproduction ratio is selected, the lens always returns to the home
position before moving to the position appropriate to the selected ratio. This also holds
true when the reproduction ratio is reset to Direct.

Power switch
ON

Copy Start key
ON

STBY

SCFW

INTR

SCRV

SCFW

SCRV

LSTR

AER
∗
Scanner home position sensor
(PS1)
Registration sensor (PS6)


ÁÁ
,,





,



,




,



AA

@, ,
Á
À

€
A
@


Forward Reverse

Scanner

Full preheating

Half pre-heating

Scanning lamp

ON Pre-heating

Half preheating

*Unless it is at the home position already, the scanner returns to the home position at power-on.

Figure 3-203

3-4

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

III. SCANNING DRIVE SYSTEM
A. Driving the Scanner
1. Outline
The scanner drive system is driven by the scanner motor (M2). The scanner motor
changes the direction of its rotation between when the scanner moves forward and when
it moves in reverse; the speed of its rotation varies according to the selected
reproduction ratio. However, the speed of its rotation remains constant regardless of the
reproduction ratio when the scanner is moving in reverse; 2. 5 times as fast as when the
scanner is moving forward.
The distance traveled by the scanner varies according to the length of copy paper
and the selected reproduction ratio.

SC-COM A
SC-COM B
SC-A
SC-A*
SC-B
SC-B*

DC controller
PCB

No. 1 mirror mount

Forward

PS1 light-blocking plate

No. 2 mirror mount

Scanner home position detection signal (SCHP)

Scanner home position sensor (PS1)

Figure 3-301

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

3-5

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

2. Relationship between the Scanner Sensor and Signals
Scanner
Scanner sensor

Signal

Description
Forward

PS1 (scanner
home position
sensor)

Reverse

SCHP

Registration clutch turns on.

After 0.1 sec, the scanner stops moving
in reverse.

Table 3-301
Reference:
The registration clutch is turned on in response to a press on the Copy Start key or
when the scanner starts to move forward.

3. Basic Sequence of Operations (scanner)
Power switch
ON

Copy Start key
ON

STBY

SCFW

INTR
AER

∗

SCRV

SCFW

SCRV

LSTR

Scanner home position sensor
(PS1)
Registration sensor (PS6)


ÁÁ
,,





,



,




,



AA

À€@,ÁÁ



AA

,,
@
€
À
@
€
À
Forward Reverse

Scanner

preHalf pre-heating Full
heating ON Prehe-ating

Scanning lamp

Half preheating

∗Unless it is at the home position already, the scanner returns to the home position at power-on.

Figure 3-302

3-6

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

4. Driving the Scanner Motor
a. Outline
The scanner motor (M2) is a 4-phase control stepping motor. The direction and the
speed of the scanner motor (M2) are switched by controlling the output timing of drive
power SC-COMA and SC-COMB and pulse signals A, A*, B, and B*.
b. Mechanism
The microprocessor (Q301) on the DC controller PCB receives such instructions as
on copy mode and reproduction ratio from the control panel circuit; in response, it sends
drive pulses to the scanning motor (M2) through the motor drive circuit.
The scanner motor is a 4-phase control stepping motor, and is used to control the
sequence of drive pulses (SC-A through SC-B*) and frequency, thereby controlling the
direction of scans and speed.
The motor drive voltage ON/OFF switching circuit supplies or deprives the motor with
or of power, thereby controlling the motor drive.
The current switching control circuit sets the current that flows through the motor
according to the revolution, and the motor driver circuit controls the constant current
according to the value that has been set.

Figure 3-303

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

3-7

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

5. Scanner Operations in Page Separation Mode (non-AE, page separation, A4, 2
copies)

Figure 3-304
I, II, and III shown in Figure 3-108 are controlled by the microprocessor on the DC
controller PCB with reference to the scanner home position signal (falling edge of SCHP)
of the first original.
The microprocessor determines the distance to be traveled by the scanner according
to the size of the selected cassette.
I, II: The distance traveled by the scanner is determined by the reproduction ratio and
cassette size.
III: The copier does not have a mechanism that detects the size of originals; for this
reason, control for page separation is exerted with reference to the size of the
cassette.
If the distance traveled by the scanner forward (II in Figure 3-304) exceeds 216 mm
(approx.), the copier assumes a point corresponding to 216 mm to be the leading
edge of the second page.
The size of originals is checked only if an ADF (accessory) is installed.
The microprocessor identifies the result of dividing the identified size by 2 as the
center of the original and operates the scanner assuming that the center represents
the leading edge of the second original.

3-8

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

IV. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
This section explains mechanical characteristics and describes how to
disassemble/assemble the machine.
Be sure to observe the following whenever disassembling/assembling the machine:
1. ! Disconnect the power plug before starting the work.
2. Unless otherwise shown, assemble the parts by reversing the steps given to
disassemble them.
3. Identify each screw by type (length, diameter) and location.
4. A washer is used for one of the mounting screws on the rear cover to protect against
static electricity; be sure to use the washer when assembling the part.
5. A washer is used for some mounting screws (for grounding wire, varistor) to ensure
correct electrical continuity; be sure to use the washer when assembling the part.
6. As a rule, do not operate the machine while any of its parts are removed.
7. When sliding out the duplexing unit or the fixing assembly, be sure to turn off the front
door switch or the power switch.

A. Scanner Drive Assembly
1. Detaching the Scanner Drive Motor
1) Remove the upper rear cover.
2) Disconnect the connector q of the motor, and remove the two screws w; then,
detach the scanner drive motor e.
e

w

w

q

Figure 3-401

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

3-9

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

2. Detaching the Scanner Cable
1) Detach the copyboard cover, right cover, left cover, upper rear cover, and lower rear
cover.
2) Detach the copyboard glass.
3) Detach the control panel.
4) Detach the copyboard cover support q.

q

Figure 3-402
5) Remove the six screws w, and detach the upper left stay e.
w

w

w

e

w

Figure 3-403
6) Fix the cable in place using a pully clip (FY9-3010)

Figure 3-404

3-10

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

7) Loosen the two screws r to loosen the cable tension (both front and right).
r

Figure 3-405
8) Move the No. 1 mirror mount to the front to align the long hole in the front side plate
and the cable fixing screw t.
Then, detach the cable fixing screw t to separate the No. 1 mirror mount and the
scanner cable (both front and rear).

t

(front)

t

(rear)
Figure 3-406

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

3-11

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

9) Remove the pully clip, and detach the scanner cable (both front and rear).
3. Assembling the Mirror Position Tool
1) Remove the screw found in position B.

B

A

A
B

Position B

Figure 3-407
2) Fit the screw removed in step 1) in position A, and tighten it slightly.
3) Extend the arm accommodated by the main frame unit it butts against the stopper as
in Figure 3-408.
4) Tighten the screw.

B

B

A

A

Position A

Figure 3-408

3-12

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

4. Routing the Scanner Cable
Keep the mirror positioning tool (FY9-3009) and pulley clip (FY9-3010) handy when
routing the scanner cable.
Further, if you are using the mirror positioning tool, assemble it in advance by
referring to “3. Assembling the MIrror Positioning Tool.”
B

B

A

A

Figure 3-409

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

3-13

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

1) Put the steel ball into the hole of the pulley, and wind the cable four times toward the
flange and then nine times in the opposite direction; thereafter, fix it in place using
the pulley clip.
2) As in w, set the mirror positioning tool between the No. 1 and No. 2 mirror mounts.
3) Loosen the screw on the mirror pulley mount as in e; then, temporarily fix the cable
in position on the left stay.
4) Route the cable as shown in the illustration; engage t on the hook on the side plate,
and engage the i on the tension plate on the lens mount.
5) Tighten the screw loosened in e, and fix the cable to the left stay.
6) Loosen the screws on the drive pulley once so that the tension of the scanner cable
is even as in !0; then, tighten it once again.
7) Fix the No. 1 mirror mount and the scanner cable fixing as in !1.
8) Make adjustments so that the length of the cable is 34 ±1 mm as in o using a ruler.
Set screws

w
Screw

e
Losen the screw,
and shift.

!0
Loosen the set
screw to free the
totation of the
pulley.

Put the steel ball into
the hole in the
pulley, and wind the
cable nine times
toward the inside
and four times
toward the outside;
then, fit the pulley clip.

Set the mirror
positioning tool

i
Re-tighten
the screw.

Pulley clip

Steel ball

q

t
o
y
r
u

34±1mm

!1

Figure 3-410

3-14

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

Caution:
When attaching the wire spring, pay attention to the orientation of the spring; see
the diagrams below. If not attached correctly, its hook tip could interfere with the
cable.

Hook

Wirespring

Hook
Wirespring

Cable

Cable

Figure 3-411

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

3-15

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

5. Adjusting the Position of the Mirrors (optical length of No. 1, 2, and 3 mirrors)
1) Keep the mirror positioning tool handy.
(See “3. Assembling the Mirror Positioning Tool.”)
2) Move the No. 1 mirror mount toward the front, and align the angular hole in the front
side plate and the cable fixing screw q.

q

(front)

(rear)

Figure 3-412
3) Loosen the set screw on the pulley.
4) Set the mirror positioning tool w to the No. 1 mirror mount and the No. 2 mirror mount
(both front and rear).

Mirror positioning tool (front)

Mirror positioning tool (rear)

(front)
(front)

Figure 3-413

3-16

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

5) Attach the scanner cable fixing to the No. 1 mirror mount using two screws e (both
front and rear).
6) Tighten the screw on the pulley.
7) Detach the tool (FY9-3009).

e

(front)

(rear)

Figure 3-414
6.
1)
2)
3)

Cleaning the Scanner No. 6 Mirror
Open the front cover.
Open the copier by operating the copier open/close lever.
Detach the dust-proofing glass q and dust-proof mirror cover w.

w

q

Figure 3-415
4) Clean the No. 6 mirror using a blower brush or lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

3-17

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

B. Lens Drive Assembly
1.
1)
2)
3)
4)

Detaching the Lens Drive Motor
Detach the upper rear cover and right glass rerainer.
Detach the copyboard glass.
Move the No. q mirror assembly 1 to the left.
Remove the two screws w, and detach the lens cover e.

w

w
e

q

Figure 3-416
5) Loosen the tension on the spring r, and detach the cable t.
t

r

Figure 3-417

3-18

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

6) Disconnect the two connectors y from the copier’s rear.

y

Figure 3-418
7) Remove the two screws u, and detach the lens drive unit i.

i

u

Figure 3-419
8) Remove the two screws, and disconnect the connector !0; then, detach the lens
motor !1.
Caution:
Disconnect the connector !0 first before removing the screw o; otherwise, the
harness and driver will come into contact with each other.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

3-19

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

!0

o

!1

Figure 3-420
2. Routing the Lens Cable

SL
2

Turn clockwise
three times.

1

3

Figure 3-421 Lens Drive Assembly
1) Attach the lens cable to each pulley q while winding it around the lens pulley w as
indicated in Figure 3-421.
2) Move the tension pulley e to hook the cable.

3-20

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

3. Adjusting the Position of the Change Solenoid
Make adjustments by loosening the two screws t so that the gear r is moved fully
in the direction of b by the arm e when the steel core q of the solenoid is fully pushed
in the direction of B by a finger, i.e., when the E-ring w comes into contact with the
solenoid.

3
1

5

a

b

4

2

A

B

Figure 3-422

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

3-21

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

3-22

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAR. 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4
IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
This chapter discusses the principles of how images are formed. It also explains the timing at
which the various units involved in image formation are operated, and shows how they may be
disassembled/assembled and adjusted.

I.

PROCESSES .....................................4-1
A. Outline ...........................................4-1
B. Basic Sequence of Operations
(image formation system)..............4-3
C. Controlling the Scanning Lamp .....4-4
D. Controlling the Primary Charging
Roller Bias .....................................4-10
E. Controlling the Transfer Roller
Bias................................................4-13
F. Controlling the Static Eliminator
Bias................................................4-16
G. Controlling Blank Exposure ...........4-18
H. Controlling the Primary Corona
Roller Cleaning Mechanism ..........4-20
I. Releasing the Transfer Roller ........4-21

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

II.

III.

DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY AND
CLEANING ASSEMBLY .....................4-22
A. Outline ...........................................4-22
B. Controlling the Toner Level
Detection .......................................4-23
C. Controlling the Development
Bias................................................4-25
D. Automatic Control of Copy
Density...........................................4-27
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ......4-30
A. Illumination Assembly....................4-30
B. Drum Unit ......................................4-39
C. Primary Corona Assembly.............4-41
D. Transfer Charging Assembly .........4-44
E. Developing System........................4-47

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

I. PROCESSES
A. Outline
Figure 4-101 shows the basic construction of the copier’s image formation system,
whose main functions are as follows:
• scanning lamp control
• primary charging control
• transfer charging control
• separation static eliminator control
• developing bias control
• blank exposure lamp control
Scanning lamp
Pre-exposure lamp
Optical
image
Primary corona assembly

,,,
Light area
,,,
,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
-- Dark
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
+++++
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
+++ --- area
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
++
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
-,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
+
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
+
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
-,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
++ --,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
-,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Photosensitive
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
++
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Blade
++ ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
drum
Cleaning blade
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
+ ,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Developing
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Blade
-,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
++ ,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,
+
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
cylinder
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
+
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
+ ,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
+
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
+++
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
+
+
Scoop-up sheet
+
+
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,

Paper

Sttic eliminator
Transfer corona
assembly

Composite Power Supply PCB

DC controller PCB
Figure 4-101

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

4-1

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

Copyboard glass

Lens
Scanning lamp

Blank exposure unit

AE sensor

Developing cylinder
Primary
charging
roller

DC controller
PCB

Composite power
supply

Scanning lamp
ON control
circuit assembly
Microprocessor
(Q301)

High-voltage
circuit
assembly

Microprocessor
(Q512)

Static
eliminator
Transfer
roller

T101

Figure 4-102

4-2

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

B. Basic Sequence of Operations (image formation system)
Power switch Copy Start key
ON
ON
STBY

INTR

SCFW

SCRV

SCFW

SCRV

LSTR

AER






,,




,,



,,
*1

Main motor/Pre-exposure lamp
Primary charging
Transfer charging
Transfer cleaning
Reference bias (ATVC)

,,






,
S¤

S
¥ 
T¤


Separation static eliminator

Developing bias AC component

Developing bias DC component
Scanning lamp

*2

*3

*2 *3

*4

1
2
3
4

*2

*4

AE only.
half pre-heating control.
full pre-heating control.
ON pre-heating control.

Figure 4-103

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

4-3

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

C. Controlling the Scanning Lamp
1. Outline
Figure 4-104 shows the circuit that controls the scanning lamp; the circuit has the
following functions:
• turns on and off the scanning lamp.
• controls scanning lamp pre-heating operation.
• controls scanning lamp intensity.
• controls the scanning lamp heater.
The copier’s scanning lamp is a fluorescent lamp.
In general, a fluorescent lamp is low in intensity immediately after power-on,
gradually increasing in intensity as time passes, without control; in particular, it takes a
long time before the intensity stabilizes in a low temperature environment.
If the ambient temperature drops below 15°C, the copier may enter and remain in
wait state before a specific intensity can be obtained. To prevent this from occurring, a
fluorescent lamp is provided for installation in low temperature environments.
To ensure that the lamp exposes an original at a stable intensity, a fluorescent lamp
adjusting sensor is used to monitor the intensity of the lamp during copying operation,
thereby controlling it to a specific value.
In addition, half pre-heating is executed between power-on and a press on the Copy
Start key so as to ensure that the lamp reaches its optimum intensity within a short
period of time after a press on the Copy Start key; thereafter, full pre-heating is
performed. (See Figure 4-105.)
J205

T401

Composite power
supply PCB
Fluorescent
lamp preheating circuit

(FL1)

DC controller PCB
FLPRHT*

J211-3

32KHzCLC

Scanning lamp

Microprocessor
(Q301)

T101
Main switch

Fluorescent
lamp drive
circuit

FL ON
MPWM
FLS

Microprocessor
(Q512)
VR301

SW2

T103

J202-1
(H2)

Q108
FLTHON

Fluorescent lamp
heater

J302-9

Main transformer
(T101) drive circuit

Fluorescent lamp
heater switch

J211-9
Fluorescent lamp
heater
control circuit

5V

Reversal
amplifier
circuit

FLHTOFF*
FLTH

-2
FLTH

(TH3)

J317-1
-2

Fluorescent lamp
thermistor
J701-1
Fluores
cent lamp
-3
intensity
sensor

-4

Figure 4-104

4-4

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

2. Turning On and Off the Scanning Lamp
The microprocessor (Q301) on the DC controller PCB exerts control so that the
microprocessor (Q512) on the composite power supply PCB generates the scanning
lamp ON signal (FLON)=0 (pulse signal, 1 kHz). At the time, the fluorescent lamp drive
circuit applies the output of the secondary side of the transformer (T101) to the scanning
lamp (FL1), thereby allowing current to flow through the scanning lamp and causing the
lamp to turn on at a high frequency (about 120 kHz).
3. Pre-Heating Control (scanning lamp)
The copier exerts four modes of control; namely, half pre-heating, full pre-heating,
ON pre-heating I, and ON pre-heating II.
These modes of control are executed by the microprocessor (Q301) on the DC
controller by varying the duty ratio of the fluorescent lamp pre-heat signal (FLPRHT;
pulse) of 5 kHz to suit each pre-heat control mode sent to each scanning lamp pre-heat
circuit. Based on the signal, the scanning lamp pre-heat circuit modulates the amplitude
of the signal (32 kHz); in response, the secondary side of the transformer (T401) turns
on to allow the fluorescent lamp pre-heat current to flow, thereby starting pre-heating
operation. (For the sequence of operations, see Figure 4-105.)
4. Sequence of Operations (scanning lamp pre-heating control; AE, A4,
continuous, 2 copies)
Power switch
ON

Copy Start key
ON

,





,
,




,
,,


,,,



,,



STBY

INTR

SCFW

SCRV

SCFW

SCRV LSTR

STBY

AER

*1 *2

Scanner

*1

Scanning lamp

Primary charging

1
2
3

*2 1.5 sec

half pre-heating control.
full pre-heating control.
ON pre-heating I or II control.

*3

*3

*1




Figure 4-105

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

4-5

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

■ Input Signals from the DC Controller to the Composite Power Supply PCB
Half preheating
Duty ratio (5 kHz) 25.9 %
Filament voltage

2.5Vrms

Full preheating

Fluorescent lamp Fluorescent lamp
ON I*
ON II*

60 %

44.4 %

55 %

4.5Vrms

3.6Vrms

4.1Vrms

*ON duty ratio of FLOW signal (in relation to 1kHz):
40% or more ................................ON I
less than 40% ..............................ON II
Table 4-101
■ Half Pre-Heating Control (between press on Power switch and press on Copy Start
key; part of scanner reverse travel)
OFF
FLON signal
5KHz
25.9%
5V
FLPRHT signal

0V

Figure 4-106
■ Full Pre-Heating Control (initial rotation, last rotation, part of scanner reverse travel)
OFF
FLON signal
5KHz
60%
5V
FLPRHT signal

0V

Figure 4-107

4-6

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

■ Scanning Lamp ON Pre-Heating Control (during copying operation I)
1KHz
OFF

40% or more

OFF

FLON signal
ON

ON

5KHz
44.4%
5V
FLPRHT signal

0V

Figure 4-108
5. Controlling the Intensity of the Scanning Lamp (FL1)
• If the intensity of the fluorescent lamp is too low at power-on,
The starting power of the intensity adjustment sensor lowers, and the fluorescent lamp
intensity adjustment signal (FLS) of the amplifier circuit on the DC controller increases.
In response to the signal, the microprocessor (Q512) on the composite power supply
PCB reduces the duty ratio, thereby increasing the ON time of the FLON signal.
The current flows through the filament of the fluorescent lamp when both the MPWM
signal (150 kHz) and the FLON signal (1 kHz) are on.
• If the intensity of the fluorescent lamp is too high at power-on,
The starting power of the intensity adjustment sensor rises, and the fluorescent lamp
intensity adjustment signal (FLS) of the amplifier circuit on the DC controller PCB
decreases. In response to the signal, the microprocessor (Q512) on the composite
PCB increases the duty ratio, thereby decreasing the ON time of the FLON signal.
Caution:
Gain Adjustment for the Intensity Adjustment Sensor (VR301)
If you replaced the intensity adjustment sensor or the scanning lamp (fluorescent
lamp, FL1), or the DC controller PCB, you must always perform gain adjustment for
the intensity adjustment sensor using VR301 on the DC controller PCB. (See the p.
10-10.)

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

4-7

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

■ Input to the Reversal Amplifier Circuit (if the intensity increased gradually)
Input from intensity
adjustment sensor

Voltage (V)

Lighter
Reference voltage
(4V)

Darker

Time (t)

Reference voltage
(4V)
"C"

"D"

Figure 4-109
■ Changes in the Duty Ratio of the FLON signal
OFF
ON

FLON signal 'C'
OFF

FLON signal 'D'

ON

Figure 4-110
6. Controlling the Fluorescent Lamp Heater
As the temperature around the scanner increases, the resistance of the fluorescent
lamp thermistor (TH3) lowers, thereby lowering the voltage of the fluorescent lamp
thermal signal (FLTH). Based on the voltage, the fluorescent lamp heater control circuit
on the composite power supply PCB turns on and off the fluorescent lamp heater drive
signal (FLTHON).
You can force the fluorescent heater off by turning off the scanning lamp (fluorescent
lamp) heater switch (SW2) during the months in which the heater is not needed.

4-8

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

7. Fluorescent Lamp Automatic
Correction Control (ALVC control)
The copier executes control (ALVC control) that automatically corrects the scanning
lamp on voltage to make up for the change that otherwise could occur as a result of
deterioration of the photosensitive drum.
8. Fluorescent Lamp Protection Mechanism
If the fluorescent lamp fails or flickers continuously after copying is started, the
microprocessor on the DC controller increases the application voltage to turn on the
lamp properly.
This, however, imposes an excessive voltage to the fluorescent lamp, speeding up its
deterioration. To prevent such a problem, the DC controller turns off the power when an
error in the application voltage is detected on the composite power supply PCB.
Reference:
If the same problem occurs when the power is returned, the fluorescent lamp may
be faulty. Try replacing it.

Warning:
Do not execute operations that turn on the fluorescent lamp (coying, service mode)
without installing the fluorescend lamp.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

4-9

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

D. Controlling the Primary Charging Roller Bias
1. Outline
Figure 4-111 shows the circuit that controls the voltage applied to the primary
charging roller; the circuit has the following functions:
• turns on and off the primary charging roller bias.
• controls the primary charging roller bias to a constant voltage.
• switches the application voltage level for the primary charging roller bias.
• switches the application voltage level for the primary charging roller bias.
• corrects the scanning lamp on voltage level
The main transformer (T101) is driven by the drive signal (MPWM) generated by the
main transformer (T101).
The main transformer (T101), further, is used also as the high voltage transformer for
the DC power supply and others in addition to providing the above functions.
Composite power supply PCB
Main transformer
T101

Primary charging roller
Filter circuit

Rectifier circuit

MPWM

Main transformer
(T101)
drive circuit

Photosensitive drum

PDCS

Voltage
detection
circuit

Current
detection
circuit

PDC-PWM

Microprocessor
Q512

PCS

DC controller PCB
Q301 (Master)
Microprocessor

Figure 4-111

4-10

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

2. Turning On and Off the Primary Charging Roller Bias
The microprocessor (Q512) on the composite power supply PCB generates the
PDCPWN signal (pulse signal) under the control of the microprocessor master (Q301)
on the DC controller PCB. In response to the signal, the secondary side of the main
transformer (T101) turns on to apply a primary charging roller bias.
The main transformer (T101) is driven by the drive signal (MPWM) from the
microprocessor (Q512). The main transformer (T101) is also used as the high-voltage
transformer for the DC power supply and other loads.
3. Controlling the Primary Charging Roller Bias to a Constant Voltage
While a bias voltage is being applied to the primary charging roller, the
microprocessor (Q512) on the composite power supply PCB reads the PDCS signal
(analog signal) from the voltage detection circuit to control the PDCPWM signal so that
the output voltage is maintained at a specific level.
4. Switching the Primary Charging Roller Bias Application Voltage Level
The copier applies a cleaning bias to the transfer roller during initial rotation (INT),
while the scanner is moving in reverse (SCRV), and during last rotation, thereby cleaning
the transfer charging roller. (See p. 4-21.)
To enhance the result of cleaning by the cleaning bias and to prevent drum memory
caused by the cleaning bias, a cleaning primary charging roller bias is applied during
initial rotation and while the scanner is moving in reverse.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

4-11

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

5. Application Voltage Level (APVC) for the Primary Charging Roller and
Scanning Lamp On Voltage Level Automatic Correction
Changes in the static latent image could cause the quality of copies; such changes,
in turn, may be attributed to the following factors:
• changes in the drum sensitivity
• changes in the charge volume of the primary charging roller.
These changes occur as a result of changes in the environment in which the copier
is installed (temperature, humidity), deterioration of parts, or wear and dirt on parts.
In the case of the copier, the light potential (VL) and dark potential (VD) tend to
increase, and the primary charging roller bias application voltage level is corrected
(APVC control) to compensate for possible problems while at the same time executing
scanning lamp on voltage level correction (ALVC control); specifically, the control serves
to ensure constant light potential (VL) and dark potential (VD).
See the following for the flow of operations that occur after the power is switched on
and during initial rotation:
• Flow
A constant voltage of about –1.46 kV is applied to the primary charging roller
for about 1.5 sec.

The current at the time is measured by the current detection circuit, and the
result is sent to the microprocessor (Q512).

The microprocessor (Q512), in turn, sends the result to the microprocessor
(Q301) on the DC controller, which determines the application voltage for
the primary charging roller bias based on the input.

Caution:
You must store the APVC value recorded on the label attached to the composite
power supply PCB in service mode whenever you have replaced the composite
power supply PCB. (See p. 10-102.)

Caution:
You must enter the APVC correction voltage setting recorded on the label attached
to the front of the drum unit whenever you have replaced the drum unit. (See p. 10102.)

4-12

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

E. Controlling the Transfer Roller Bias
1. Outline
The copier uses a direct transfer method by a roller to transfer images to paper. For
this reason, its bias control differs from that of conventional copiers, which transfer
images by corona charging.
The following three types of transfer roller bias are used; go through the
descriptions for the function and output timing of each.
a. Transfer Bias
This bias corresponds to the transfer bias of conventional copiers, and is a negative
voltage (constant voltage, –3.5 kV to –6.0 kVDC).
b. Cleaning Bias
Since the copier uses a direct transfer method, jams could cause toner on the
photosensitive drum to deposit itself on the transfer roller.
To remove such deposits of toner, the copier applies a positive voltage (constant
voltage, DC) at the following timing, thereby returning the toner from the transfer roller to
the photosensitive drum.
Cleaning Bias Output Timing
• during initial rotation after a press on the Copy Start key
• while the scanner is moving in reverse (certain period)
• during last rotation (certain period)
c. Reference Bias (ATVC)
Changes in the environment or deterioration of the transfer roller can affect the
resistance of the transfer roller, ultimately affecting the transfer efficiency.
To limit the changes in the image quality brought about by such changes in the
transfer efficiency, the copier corrects the application voltage level of the transfer bias.
The transfer ATVC bias (constant current, –10 µA DC) is the bias applied to
determine the correction value each time the Start button is pressed.
Copy Start key
ON
INTR

SCFW

SCRV

SCFW

SCRV

LSTR

STRT

Main motor (M1)
Transfer bias
Cleaning bias (+)
Reference bias (ATVC)
Static eliminator bias

Figure 4-112

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

4-13

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

Figure 4-113 shows the circuit used to control the foregoing three types of bias; the
circuit has the following functions:
• turns on and off the transfer roller bias
• controls the transfer bias to a constant voltage
• controls the correction of the transfer bias voltage level

Photosensitive
drum

Composite power supply PCB

24V
DC power
supply
assembly

Transfer roller

Transfer
bias
control
circuit

24V

Constant
current circuit
(ATVC)

Current
limiter circuit
(cleaning)

Cleaning bias
control circuit

TREVON*

Current
limiter circuit
(transfer bias)

TFWS

TFWPWM

Constant
voltage control
circuit

TFWON*

Transformer
circuit

T402

Microprocessor (Q512)

DC controller PCB
Microprocessor (Q301)

Figure 4-113

4-14

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

2. Turning On and Off the Transfer Roller Bias
The TFWON signal is generated under the control of the microprocessor (Q512) on
the composite power supply PCB. The signal causes the secondary side of the transfer
transformer (T402) to turn on, thereby applying a DC bias to the transfer roller.
Table 4-102 shows combinations of signals that are used when determining the
transfer roller bias.
TREVON*

TFWON*

TFWPWM

Transfer bias output

OFF

ON

ON

Cleaning bias output

ON

OFF

OFF

Reference bias output (A TVC)

OFF

ON

OFF

Table 4-102
3. Controlling the Transfer Bias to a Constant Voltage
While the transfer DC bias is being generated, the microprocessor (Q512) on the
composite power supply PCB reads the TFWS signal (analog signal) from the constant
voltage control circuit and changes the duty ratio so that the application voltage is
maintained at a constant level, thereby controlling the TFWPWM signal.
4. Controlling the Transfer Bias Voltage Level Correction (ATVC control)
To correct the changes in the transfer efficiency caused by changes in the
environment or deterioration of the transfer roller, the application voltage level of the
transfer bias is corrected automatically.
A constant current (–10 µA) is let to flow during initial rotation after a press on the
Copy Start key. The microprocessor (Q512) on the composite power supply PCB takes
in the transfer roller application voltage at the time from the constant voltage control
circuit, and sends the data to the microprocessor (Q512) on the DC controller; the DC
controller, in turn, determines the level of the voltage to be applied to the transfer roller
based on the data.
This control is executed only once during initial rotation immediately after a press on
the Copy Start button; for this reason, the application voltage will never vary during
continuous copying operation.
5. Current Limiter Circuit (transfer bias)
Should an overcurrent flow to the secondary side of the transformer (T402) while a
transfer bias is being generated because of changes in the environment, the current
limiter circuit exerts control so as to prevent any occurrence of a current which is 50 µA
or more.
6. Current Limiter Circuit (cleaning bias)
Should an overcurrent flow to the secondary side of the transformer (T402) while a
transfer bias is being generated, the current limiter circuit exerts control to prevent any
occurrence of a current which is 10 µA or more.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

4-15

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

F. Controlling the Static Eliminator Bias
1. Outline
Figure 4-114 shows the circuit that controls the static eliminator bias; the circuit has
the following functions:
• turns on and off the static eliminator bias and controls the voltage to a constant
level
• switches the static eliminator bias voltage level

Composite power supply PCB
Main transformer
T101

Photosensitive drum
Static eliminator
bias drive
circuit

JLVCTL
Transformer
(T101)
drive circuit
MPWM

Transformer
circuit

Static
eliminator

JCTL

Microprocessor
(Q512)

J302
J301

J211
11~15
J210
1~6

DC controller PCB
Microprocessor
(Q301)

Figure 4-114

4-16

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

2. Switching the Static Eliminator Bias Voltage Level
The microprocessor (Q512) on the composite power supply PCB generates the
JCTL signal (analog signal) under the control of the DC controller PCB. In response, the
secondary side of the main transformer (T101) turns on to generate a bias for the static
eliminator with the help of the main transformer (T101).
The output of voltages (2.5 kV, 4.0 kV) is switched by the JLVCTL signal.
When the JCTL signal turns on, the drive circuit turns on to generate the static
eliminator bias.
3. Ensuring Proper Separation of Thin Paper
Under some environmental conditions, thin paper can fail to separate at times.
To ensure proper separation, the voltage applied to the static eliminator may be
permanently set to 4.0 kV.
To do this, use service mode No. 506 (separation static eliminator output voltage; see
p. 10-107).

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

4-17

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

G. Controlling Blank Exposure
1. Outline
The copier uses the reflecting plate to direct the light of the pre-exposure lamp to the
photosensitive drum by way of executing blank exposure, thereby blanking (whiting) out
the non-image areas and areas between copies.
The area of blank exposure is controlled by the two slide shutters and one open/close
shutter.

Change solenoid (SL1)
Lens motor

Gear A

M

Slide shutter (rear)

Gear B

Reflectiong plate
for size blanking

Blank shutter
solenoid
(SL3)

Pre-exposure lamp
Blanking shutter home
position sensor (PS3)
Open/close shutter

Blank shutter home position
detection signal (BSHP)

Blank shutter solenoid drive signal
(BSSLD*)

Slide shutter
(front)

Change solenoid drive signal (CHSLD*)

Reflectiong plate
for full blanking

DC controller PCB

Figure 4-115

4-18

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

2. Blanking (Whiting) of Non-Image Areas for Reduction
In Reduce mode, the change solenoid (SL1) turns on, and the lens moves according
to the selected reproduction ratio. When the change solenoid (SL1) turns off, the drive of
the lens motor is transmitted to gears A and B, thereby moving the slide shutter (rear,
front) for the appropriate distance to open the exposure window. In this condition, the
light from the pre-exposure lamp is directed to the photosensitive drum by way of the
reflecting plate for size blanking.

A
B

Figure 4-116
3. Blanking (Whiting) Out the Leading/Trailing Edges and between Copies
The blank shutter solenoid drive signal (BSSSLD) turns on or off under the control of
the microprocessor (Q301) on the DC controller. The leading/trailing edge and the area
between copies are blacked (whited) out by opening the open/close shutter in this way.
Size blanking optical path

Full blanking optical path

Reflecting plate
for size blanking
Reflecting plate
for full blanking

Open/close shutter

Image exposure
optical path

Slide shutter
Pre-exposure optical path
Drum cleaning
Drum cartridge assembly
Pre-exposure
reflecting plate

Photosensitive
drum

Figure 4-117

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

4-19

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

H. Controlling the Primary Corona Roller Cleaning Mechanism
1. Outline
The copier’s primary charging roller is equipped with an automatic cleaning
mechanism.
The automatic cleaning mechanism cleans the primary charging roller during initial
rotation(INTR) after having made 250 or more copies, i.e., after executing transfer roller
release control five times.
2. Primary Charging Roller Cleaning Operation
The primary charging roller cleaning solenoid (SL4) on signal (PCLSLD) is generated
under the control of the microprocessor (Q301) on the DC controller PCB. In response
to the signal, the cleaning pad is butted against the roller for 2 sec, during which time the
cleaning roller makes about 4 rotations.
Primary charging roller
cleaning solenoid

Fulcrum

Fulcrum Cleaning pad

Drum unit

Primary
charging
roller

Drum

Figure 4-118

4-20

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

I. Releasing the Transfer Roller
1. Outline
The copier’s transfer roller is equipped with a releasing mechanism.
The releasing mechanism releases the transfer roller to prevent adhesion of toner to
the roller under the following condition:
• during post rotation (LSTR) after as many as 50 copies or more have been made
(cumulative)
Photosensitive drum

Transfer roller
Transfer roller
releasing solenoid

Fulcrum

engaging
releasing

Figure 4-119

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

4-21

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

II. DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY AND CLEANING
ASSEMBLY
A. Outline
The copier’s photosensitive drum, developing cylinder, No. 1 stirring rod, and No. 2
stirring blade are rotated by the drive of the main motor (M1).
The level of the toner inside the developing assembly is monitored by the toner
sensor; when it drops below a specific level, the Add Toner indicator flashes on the
display of the control panel.
The No. 1 stirring rod serves to supply toner to the developing cylinder and stir the
toner flow layer inside the developing chamber.
The No. 2 stirring blade is used to stir the toner inside the toner container and, at the
same time, to supply toner to the developing chamber.
The waste toner collected by the cleaning blade is forwarded by the waste toner feed
blade for collection inside the waste toner assembly.
Drum cartridge

Cleaning blade

Toner container

Primary charging
roller
Photosensitive
drum
Toner sensor

Waste toner
feeding blade
Waste toner
assembly
Developing
cylinder
No. 1
stirring rod

Main motor/
Main motor
driver PCB

M1

Motor drive signal

Toner level
detection PCB
Toner out signal
(TEP*)

Torque limiter

No. 2 stirring blade

DC controller PCB

Figure 4-201

4-22

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

B. Controlling the Toner Level Detection
The level of toner inside the cartridge is monitored by the antenna sensor circuit.
The toner level sensor is found inside the cartridge, and an AC bias is applied to the
developing cylinder.
The developing cylinder and the toner level sensor are connected by means of static
electricity; the volumes of charges between the two vary according to the amount of
toner inside the cartridge; as a result, an AC bias that represents the level of the toner
is checked by the toner level sensor, and the data is sent to the antenna sensor circuit.
The antenna sensor circuit receives a reference signal from the composite power
supply circuit; the reference signal is an AC bias with a specific AC bias that has gone
through attenuation.
In the antenna circuit, the signal coming from the toner level sensor and the
reference signal are compared to find out the level of toner.
Blade mount
Toner

Toner level
sensor

Developing assembly
frame

Blade

Antenna sensor circuit

DC controller
PCB

Comparator circuit

Developing cylinder

TEP*

Figure 4-202

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

4-23

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

q When the Level of Toner Is Adequate
The presence of toner around the toner level sensor causes the AC bias generated
by the sensor to be larger than the reference signal.
The condition causes the output from the comparator circuit to go ‘1’ and the toner
out signal (TEP*) to go ‘0’.
w When the Level of toner Is Inadequate
The toner around the toner level sensor decreases in amount, causing the AC bias
generated by the sensor to lower.
Since the reference signal, on the other hand, remains unchanged, the output
voltage remains high.
The difference in the potential causes the output of the comparator circuit to go ‘0’,
causing the toner out signal (TEP*) to go ‘1’.
The condition causes the microprocessor (Q301) in the DC controller cirucit to make
checks only during copying operating (AC bias ON); if it detects the toner out signal=0,
each lasting 0.25 sec or more, for a total time equivalent of three copies, the Cartridge
indicator is flashed on the display of the control panel.
e Torque Limiter
If an excessive load is imposed on the photosensitive drum because of excessive
amounts of waste toner or some other reason while the drum is rotating, the torque
limiter cuts off the drive from the main motor to stop the rotating of the drum.

Power switch Copy Start key
ON
ON
STBY

Cartridge indicator
flashing timing
Copy

STBY

Copy

STBY

Copy

Main motor (M1)

Toner level detection timing

Toner out signal (TEP*)

1st (3 sec)

2nd (1 sec)

3rd (0.5 sec)

AC bias

Cartridge indicator (tlashing)
A4, AE3 copies, continuous mode

Figure 4-203

4-24

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

C. Controlling the Development Bias
1. Outline
Figure 4-204 shows the circuit used to control the development bias; the circuit has
the following functions:
• turns on and off the AC component of the development bias
• turns on and off the DC component of the development bias
• controls the voltage level of the DC component of the development bias
• controls the DC component of the development bias to a constant level
2. Turning On and Off the DC Component of the Developing Bias and Controlling
the Voltage to a Constant Level
The microprocessor (Q512) on the composite power supply PCB generates the
BPWM signal (pulse signal) under the control of the microprocessor master (Q301) on
the DC controller PCB. In response, the secondary side of the main transformer (T101)
turns on to apply the DC component of the development bias.
In addition, while the DC component of the development bias is being applied, the
application voltage is taken in from the development DC bias voltage detection circuit in
the form of the BIASS signal (analog signal) to exert control so that the output voltage is
maintained at a constant level.
The main transformer (T101) is driven by the drive signal (MPWM) from the
microprocessor (Q512). In addition to the foregoing functions, the main transformer
(T101) is also used as the high-voltage transformer for the DC power supply and other
loads.
Composite power supply PCB
Main transformer
T101
Development
DC bias drive
circuit

Development AC bias
transformer
T301

BPWM

Transformer (T101)
drive circuit

BIASS

Development
AC transformer
drive circuit
Microprocessor
(Q512)

Photosensitive
drum
Developing cylinder

ACBIAS

Development
DC bias voltage
detection circuit

MPWM

J302
J301

J211
1~15
J210
1~6

AE sensor
Microprocessor
(Q301)
Copy Density key

Copy density
correction volume
(VR302)

DC controller PCB

Figure 4-204

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

4-25

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

3. Turning On and Off the AC Component of the Development Bias
The microprocessor (Q512) on the composite power supply PCB generates the
ACBIAS signal (pulse signal) under the control of the microprocessor master (Q301) on
the DC controller PCB. In response to the signal, the development bias AC component
generating transformer (T301) turns on to add the AC component of the development
bias to the DC component for application.
• application frequency
2400 Hz (approx.)
• application voltage
1300 Vp-p (approx.)
4. Controlling the Voltage Level of the DC Component of the Development Bias
The copier modifies the voltage level of the DC component of the development bias
based on the following factors:
• setting of the Copy Density key
• output of the AE sensor
• position of the Copy Density Correction knob (VR302)
The copier controls so that the voltage of the DC component of the development bias
varies between –80 and –560 V (in actual terms) by varying the output of the BPWM
signal.
To ompensate increases in the light potential (VL) caused by deterioration of the
photosensitive drum, the copier is equipped with a copy density correction volume. You
may operate the volume (VR302) on the DC controller PCB to adjust the potential of the
DC bias for any increase in VL, thereby freeing the copies of fogging.

(to lighter)

(to darker)
VR302

Developing bias
(DC component)
Darker
Medium
Lighter

-500
-400

-100
(darker)

5
(lighter)
Copy density

Figure 4-205

4-26

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

D. Automatic Control of Copy Density
1. Outline
The copier has an automatic density adjustment mechanism (AE), which
automatically controls the DC component of the development bias according to the
density of originals. As long as the original is more or less uniform in density, the AE
mechanism varies the DC component of the development bias accordingly to ensure
fogging-free copies.
The DC component controlled in AE mode is indicated in the copy density display of
the control panel.
2. Control Method
During initial rotation (INTR), the scanning lamp (FL1) is turned on at a specific
intensity and the scanner is moved forward about 65 mm to expose the original.
With the scanner in this position, the reflected light over the area shown in Figure 4207 is measured by the AE sensor (photodiode), and the measurements are sent to the
DC controller PCB.
In response, the DC controller PCB computes the optimum value of the development
DC bias for copying operation, and generates the result to the microprocessor on the
composite power supply. Figure 4-206 shows the changes in the DC component of the
development bias caused by the changes in the density of an original.
The graph is based on the amount of exposure that brings optimum density without
fogging when copies are made of a newspaper or a Test Sheet.
Developing DC bias
Copy density 9
(equivalent)
Copy density 7.5
(equivalent)

Copy density 5
(equivalent)

Newspaper
Test Sheet Density of original

Figure 4-206

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

4-27

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

27 mm
(approx.)

Center reference
A

14 mm
(approx.)

50 mm (approx.)

27 mm
(approx.)

Note: A indiates the position of the AE sensor

Figure 4-207 (Area Read by the AE Sensor)
Reference:
When copies are made in AE using an ADF-E1 (accessory), the density is checked
for each original.

4-28

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

3. AE Adjustment
The copier’s AE adjustment is executed in service mode and consists of the following
three types:
• lamp intensity automatic adjustment (No. 301) during AE scans
• copy density (development bias) standard adjustment (No. 302) during AE mode
• copy density (development bias) slope adjustment (No. 303) during AE mode
Item

Description

Adjustments

No. 301

Lamp intensity
automatic
adjustment during AE scans

Remarks
The density is adjusted automatically so that the copy
density will be 5 when making copies of the Test Chart.

Lighter 9

Copy
density 5

Density
Density of
Original

Test Chart

No. 302

Copy density
(development
bias) standard
adjustment
during AE
mode

w

q If the setting is decreased
in service mode,
→AE copies will be
darker.
w If the setting is increased
in service mode,
→AE copies will be
lighter.

q

Lighert 9

Copy
density 5

Density
Test Chart

No. 303

Copy density
(development
bias) slope
adjustment
during AE
mode

Density of
Original

q
Lighter 9

w
Copy
density 5

default: 0
settings: -26 to +26
q If the setting is increased
in service mode,
→copies of a newspaper
will be lighter.
w If the setting is decreased
in service mode,
→copies of a newspaper
will be darker.

Density
Test Chart

Newspaper Density of
Original

default: 0
settings: -26 to +26

Table 4-201

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

4-29

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

III. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
This section explains mechanical characteristics and describes how to
disassemble/assemble the machine.
Be sure to observe the following when disassembling/assembling the machine:
1. ! Disconnect the power plug before starting the work.
2. Unless otherwise shown, assemble the parts by reversing the steps given to
disassemble them.
3. Identify each screw by type (length, diameter) and location.
4. A washer is used for one of the mounting screws on the rear cover to protect against
static electricity; be sure to use the washer when assembling the part.
5. A washer is used for some mounting screws (for grounding wire, varistor) to ensure
correct electrical continuity; be sure to use the washer when assembling the part.
6. As a rule, do not operate the machine while any of its parts are removed.
7. When sliding out the duplexing unit or the fixing assembly, be sure to turn off the front
door switch or the power switch.

A. Illumination Assembly
1.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)

Detaching the Scanning Lamp/Fluorescent Lamp Heater
Disconnect the power plug.
Detach the copyboard glass.
Detach the upper rear cover.
Move the scanner unit near the center.
Remove the two screws q, and detach the light-blocking plate w.

w

q
Figure 4-301

4-30

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

6) Disconnect the connectors e, r.
e

r

Figure 4-302
7) Remove the screw t, and disconnect the connector y.
8) Pull the fluorescent lamp u slowly toward the front to detach.
u

y

t
Figure 4-303

Caution:
Do not touch the fluorescent lamp. (Use lint-free paper.)

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

4-31

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

9) Detach the fluorescent lamp heater i from the fluorescent lamp.
i

Figure 4-304
2. Points to Note When Attaching the Fluorescent Lamp Heater/Scanning Lamp
• Attach the heater to the lamp as follows:
Light-emitting
portion

60m

m

1~

5m

m

Heater

60m

m

Figure 4-305
Caution:
Do not touch the fluorescent lamp. (Use lint-free paper.)
Do not block the light-emitting portion by the fluorescent lamp heater.

4-32

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

Attach the scanning lamp so that its light-emitting portion (open side) is to the left
when viewed from the front of the copier as shown in Figure 4-306.
Light-emitting
portion

Figure 4-306 (front view)
Caution:
Do not touch the fluorescent lamp. (Use rint-free paper)
Be sure to adjust the gain and AE whenever you have replaced the fluorescent
lamp. (See p. 10-10.)
• Make sure that the cut-off of the fluorescent heater is correctly oriented in relation
to the intensity adjustment sensor.

Fluorescent heater

Adjustment sensor

Figure 4-307

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

4-33

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

Reference:
The fluorescent lamp heater will not operate unless the copier’s heater switch is
turned on.
3.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)

Detaching the Blank Exposure Assembly
Open the front cover.
Pull the copier’s open/close lever to open the copier.
Detach the inside cover.
Detach the exhaust fan and Drum cartridge. (See “Detaching the Exhaust Fan”.)
Disconnect the connector q (J315) on the DC controller PCB, and remove the two
screws w.
q

w

Figure 4-308
6) Push up the blank exposure assembly e lightly upward, and pull it out toward the
bottom front.
e

Figure 4-309

4-34

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4. Detaching the Blank Exposure Lamp
1) Detach the blank exposure assembly. (See “3. Detaching the Blank Exposure
Assembly on p. 4-34.”)
2) Remove the four screws q, and disconnect the connector w.
q

q

w
Figure 4-310
3) Disconnect the connector e.

e

Figure 4-311

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

4-35

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4) Remove the three screws r, and detach the blank exposure lamp t.
r

t

Figure 4-312
5. Detaching the Blank Shutter Solenoid
1) Detach the blank exposure assembly.
2) Detach the blank shutter upper plate, and disconnect the connector q. (See “3.
Detaching the Blank Exposure Assembly on p. 4-34.”)
3) Remove the E-ring w, and detach the link arm e from the blank shutter.
4) Remove the two screws r, and pull out the blank shutter solenoid.

e

r

q

w

Figure 4-313

4-36

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

6. Positioning the Blank Shutter Solenoid
Adjust the position of the solenoid so that the bottom A is 7.7 ±0.5 mm on both sides
of the shutter when the solenoid is moved in the direction of activation. When taking
measurements, do not push down the shutter.
After adjustments, make sure that the solenoid moves smoothly.

A

Figure 4-314a

Figure 4-314b

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

4-37

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

7. Routing the Blanking Cable
Put the spring on the outside.
Slide shutter (rear)

Wind 3.5 items
Slide shutter (front)

Figure 4-315
8. Positioning the Left/Right Margin
Turn the blanking shutter adjusting screw on the copier’s front side plate shown in
Figure 4-316 so that the standards are met.
q clockwise turn
w counterclockwise turn
e a full turn

moves the margin to the front.
moves the margin to the rear.
moves about 1 mm.
q

Figure 4-316

4-38

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

B. Drum Unit
1. Detaching the Drum Unit
1) Open the front door.
2) Pull out the developing assembly releasing lever q toward the front, and turn it
clockwise.

Figure 4-317
3) Open the copier’s top unit.
4) Turn the knob w counterclockwise to detach.
5) Pull out the drum unit e toward the front.

Figure 4-318

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

4-39

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

Caution:
Take care not to damage the photosensitive drum.
The photosensitive drum is highly susceptible to light, and exposure even to room
lighting can lead to white spots or black bands on the copies.
As a rule, do not turn on the copier with the drum unit removed; otherwise, the
registration roller and the transfer guide will interfere with each other, and rotation
of the registration roller during WMUP will damage the roller.

2. Cleaning
If the surface of the photosensitive drum has become soiled, clean it with a flannel
cloth coated with toner; do not use paper, lint-free or otherwise.
Caution:
Do not dry-wipe or use solvent.
Do not use drum cleaning powder.

4-40

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

C. Primary Corona Assembly
1. Detaching the Primary Corona Assembly
1) Detach the drum unit.
2) Slide the lock q of the top of the drum unit in the direction of the arrow.

q

q
Figure 4-319
3) Detach the primary corona assembly unit w together with the holder while rotating it
in the direction of the arrow.

w

Figure 4-320

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

4-41

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

2. Cleaning the Cleaning Pad and the Primary Corona Roller
1) Detach the primary corona unit.
2) Place the primary corona assembly as shown in the figure, and clean the cleaning
pad e with a cotton wad r or folded lint-free paper.
Caution:
• Dry-wipe only. Do not use water, alcohol, or solvent.
• Be sure to use strokes in one direction only.

e

r

Figure 4-321
3) Clean the primary charging roller t with lint-free paper y while rotating it.
Caution:
• Dry-wipe only. Do not use water, alcohol, or solvent.
• Be sure to use strokes in one direction only.

t

y

Figure 4-322

4-42

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

3. Positioning the Solenoid for the Primary Charging Roller
Make adjustments by loosening the two screws used to fix the solenoid e in place
and moving the solenoid e into the direction of arrow B so that r in Figure 4-323 is 4.0
±0.2 mm when the joint q is butted against point a of the solenoid support w.
q

w
B

e

a
= 4.0 ± 0.2

Figure 4-323
Caution:
You must make the adjustment whenever you have replaced the solenoid.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

4-43

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

D. Transfer Charging Assembly
1.
1)
2)
3)
4)

Detaching the Transfer Roller
Open the front door.
Open the copier’s top body.
Detach the static eliminator.
Detach the bushing q, and lift the transfer roller w to detach.

Figure 4-324
Caution:
Do not touch the surface of the roller.
Do not soil the surface of the roller.
2.
1)
2)
3)
4)

Attaching the Drum Heater
Detach the front cover.
Open the copier’s top body by operating the copier open/close lever.
Detach the inside cover.
Remove the three fixing screws w, and detach the harness cover q.

Figure 4-325

4-44

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

5) Detach the transfer roller and the static eliminator.
6) Detach the transfer guide.
7) While butting the two heaters against the transfer guide as shown in Figure 4-326, fix
them in place using two screws e; then, fix the harness using two harness bands r
(front, rear).
8) Fix the harness with two SK binders t (front, rear) in place, and insert it into the
transfer guide.

Figure 4-326
Caution:
When fixing the harness in place, make sure that the cap portions of the terminal
are alternated as shown in Figure 4-327; if bundled in parallel, the harness will
come into contact with the transfer roller.

Figure 4-327

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

4-45

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

9) Connect the connector y as shown in Figure 4-328.

Figure 4-328
Caution:
Make sure that the spring at the rear is securely in the groove when attaching the
transfer guide to the copier after attaching the drum heater.

4-46

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

E. Developing System
1.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)

Removing the Developing Assembly
Open the copier’s front door.
Operate the open/close lever to open the top body.
Turn the locking lever q clockwise to unlock the developing assembly.
Remove the screw w.
Pull the developing assembly e slowly to the front.

2

3

1

Figure 4-329
2. Removing the Blade Assembly
1) Remove the developing assembly from the copier.
2) Remove the four screws q, and remove the developing cover w.
q

w

q
Figure 4-330

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

4-47

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

3) Place a newspaper or the like on the floor or a desk top, and pour out the toner from
the developing assembly.
4) Remove the two screws e, and remove the blade assembly* r.
* consisting of the blade and its mount.
r

e

Figure 4-331
3. Removing the Developing Cylinder Side Seal
1) Remove the developing assembly from the copier.
2) Remove the blade assembly.
Caution:
The blade must be installed at high precision. Do not remove it in the field. If
necessary, remove it intact on its mounting plate.
3) Remove the screw q, and remove the front cover w.

w

q
Figure 4-332

4-48

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4) Remove the three screws e, and remove the terminal r, roll case t, and roll y.
t

r

e
e

y

Figure 4-333
5) Remove the three E-rings u, and gear i, gear o, and gear !0.
u

u

i

o

!0

Figure 4-334

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

4-49

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

6) Remove the screw !1, and remove the butting roll !2 and roll case !3.

!1

!3

!2

Figure 4-335
7) Remove the developing cylinder !4.

!4
Figure 4-336

4-50

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

8) Remove the side seal !5. (both sides)

!5

Figure 4-337

!5

Figure 4-338
4. Installing the Side Seal and the Blade Assembly
1) Clean the area where the side seal will be installed with alcohol.
2) Attach the side seal as indicated in Figure 4-339.

Figure 4-339

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

4-51

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

3) Check that the side seal and the container are in firm contact.
4) Push the developing blade unit attachment section all the way against the upper side
and secure it with the screw.

* Some

spacers are glued top and
bottom in reverse; however, regardless
of the spacer positions, attach the
unit by pushing it all the way against
the Upper side.

Figure 4-340

4-52

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5
PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
This chapter explains the principles used from when copy paper is picked up to when a copy is
delivered in view of the functions of electrical and mechanical units and in relation to their timing of
operation. It also shows how these units may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted.

I.
II.

III.

IV.

PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM ............5-1
A. Outline ...........................................5-1
PICK-UP OPERATION (COPIER) ......5-3
A. Outline ...........................................5-3
B. Sequence of Operations (pick-up/
feeding assembly; A4, 2 copies) ...5-4
PICK-UP FROM THE CASSETTE
FEEDING MODULE-A2......................5-5
A. Pick-Up Operation .........................5-5
B. Sequence of Operations
(cassette 2; A4, 2 copies)..............5-6
MULTIFEEDER...................................5-7
A. Outline ...........................................5-7
B. Identifying the Size of Paper on
the Multifeeder...............................5-8
C. Sequence of Operations
(multifeeder; A4, 2 copies) ............5-9

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

V.

IDENTIFYING THE CASSETTE
SIZE....................................................5-10
VI. IDENTIFYING JAMS ..........................5-12
A. Pre-Registration Delay Jam...........5-12
B. Pre-Registration Timing Jam .........5-13
C. Pre-Registration Stationary Jam ...5-13
D. Separation Delay Jam ...................5-14
E. Separation Stationary Jam ............5-14
F. Delivery Delay Jam........................5-15
G. Delivery Stationary Jam ................5-15
VII. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ......5-16
A. Pick-Up Assembly .........................5-16
B. Multifeeder Assembly ....................5-23
C. Registration Roller Assembly ........5-31
D. Feeding Assembly .........................5-34
E. Cassette Unit .................................5-36

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

I. PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

Fixing assembly

Photosensitive
drum

Registration
roller

Multifeeder
pick-up
roller

PS8

PS5

Feeding belt
PS6
PS7
PS4

Delivery roller

Pick-up
roller

Pick-up roller

Cassette 1

PS1cu
Vertical path roller
Pick-up clutch
PS2cu

Pick-up roller

Cassette 2
Accesorry

PS4cu

PS3cu

Cassette 3

Figure 5-101

A. Outline
The NP6218 uses center reference, in which copy paper is moved through the center
of the pick-up/feeding path for stable pick-up/feeding operation.
Pick-up operation may be the cassette 1 pick-up from the copier, cassette 2/3 pickup from the Cassette feeding Module-B2/A2 and multifeeder pick-up.
When making copies, copy paper picked up from the cassette 1/2/3 or multifeeder is
controlled by the registration roller so that the leading edge of the image on
photosensitive drum matches with the leading edge of the copy paper; the paper is then
sent to the copy tray through the transfer, separation, feeding, fixing, and delivery
assemblies.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

5-1

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

Sensor No.

Name

PS4

Multifeeder paper sensor

PS5

Cassette paper sensor

PS6

Registration sensor

PS7

Separation sensor

PS8

Delivery sensor

PS1CU

Cassette 2 vertical path sensor (Accessory)

PS2CU

Cassette 2 paper sensor (Accessory)

PS3CU

Cassette 3 vertical path sensor (Accessory)

PS4CU

Cassette 3 paper sensor (Accessory)

Table 5-101

5-2

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

II. PICK-UP OPERATION (COPIER)
A. Outline
When the pick-up clutch (CL2 or CL3) turns on while the main motor (M1) is rotating,
the pick-up roller rotates to move paper as far as the registration roller.
The copy paper is controlled so that its leading edge and the leading edge of the
image on the photosensitive drum match; then, it is moved through the transfer
assembly, feeding assembly, fixing assembly, and delivery assembly to reach the copy
tray.
As many as three photointerrupters (PS6, PS7, PS8) are provided along the paper
path, turning on the Jam indicator on the control panel when jams are identified in terms
of whether paper has reached or has moved past the respective sensors within a specific
period of time.
The presence/absence of paper inside the cassette or the multifeeder is monitored
by separate photointerpreters (PS4, PS5); when the absence of paper is identified, the
Paper indicator is flashed on the control panel.

Figure 5-201

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

5-3

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

B. Sequence of Operations (pick-up/feeding assembly; A4, 2
copies)

Figure 5-202

5-4

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

III. PICK-UP FROM THE CASSETTE FEEDING
MODULE-A2
A. Pick-Up Operation
When the pick-up clutch (CL1cu, CL2cu) turns on while the cassette unit motor
(M1cu), the pick-up roller starts to rotate to pick up copy paper; the paper is then moved
to the registration roller by the vertical path roller. (The sequence that follows is the same
as when paper is picked up from the cassette in the copier.)
For pick-up operation from the cassette feeding unit, pick-up sensors (PS1cu,
PS3cu) are used to check the arrival of paper, thereby deciding when to turn off the pickup roller according to the size of paper.

Pick-up roller
PS1cu
PS2cu

Vertical path roller
Pick-up clutch

Casette 2 size detection

CL1cu

Pick-up roller

Cassett e 2
PS4cu

Pick-up clutch

Casette 3 size detection

PS3cu

M1cu

Cassette
unit motor

Cassette feeding unit motor drive
signal (CMD)

Cassette 3 pick-up clutch drive signal (C3PUCLD*)

Cassette 3 vertical path detection signal
(C3VPD)

Cassette 2 vertical path detection signal
(C2VPD)

Cassette 3 paper detection signal (C3PD*)

Cassette 2 paper detection signal (C2PD*)

Cassette 3 size detection signal

Cassette 2 size detection signal

Cassett e 3

Cassette 2 pick-up clutch drive signal (C2PUCLD*)

CL2cu

Cassette drive PCB

DC controller PCB

Figure 5-301

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

5-5

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

B. Sequence of Operations (cassette 2; A4, 2 copies)
Copy Start key
ON
INTR

SCFW

SCRV

SCFW

SCRV

LSTR

STBY

Cassette 2 pick-up clutch
(CL1cu)
Cassette
feeding
unit

Cassette 2 vertical path sensor
(PS1cu)
Cassette feeding unit motor
(M1cu)
Registration clutch (CL1)

Copier

Registration sensor (PS6)
Main motor (M1)

Figure 5-302

5-6

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

IV. MULTIFEEDER
A. Outline
The multifeeder is designed to pick up paper loaded on its tray and is capable of
continuous pick-up operation.
Paper on the tray is detected by the multifeeder sensor (PS5).
Paper loaded on the tray is butted against the pick-up roller by the paper guide plate;
the drive from the main motor (M1) is transmitted to the pick-up roller through a clutch to
rotate the pick-up roller.
By the work of the pick-up roller and the separation pad, a single sheet of copy paper
is forwarded to the registration roller.
The series of operations is executed for each pick-up operation.
Main motor
M1

Multifeeder pick-up
clutch

CL3

Multifeeder paper sensor
Paper sensor lever
Paper guide plate
PS5

Multifeeder tray
Photosensitive
drum
Registration
roller

PS

6

Separation pad

Registration roller
paper sensor
Multifeeder pick-up
solenoid
Paper guide plate cam

SL2
Spring
clutch

Figure 5-401

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

5-7

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

B. Identifying the Size of Paper on the Multifeeder
The width of copy paper is identified by a variable resistor (VR1) which operates in
response to the location of the slide guide, which is adjusted by the user to suit the size
of paper.
The identified width of copy paper is used for blank exposure control.
The length of paper when the multifeeder is used is identified by the period of time
during which the registration sensor (PS6) remains on.
The data collected in such a way is used to control the length of blank exposure,
activation of the registration roller, and high voltage.
Reference:
The maximum length of paper is 432 mm (LDG size); paper longer than this will
lead to a jam.

Multifeeder paper
width detection
(MFPWD)

DC controller PCB

Slide guide (rear)

Variable resistor (VR1)

Slide guide (Front)
Multifeeder tray

Figure 5-402

5-8

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

C. Sequence of Operations (multifeeder; A4, 2 copies)
Copy Start key
ON
INTR

SCFW

SCRV

SCFW

SCRV

LSTR

Multifeeder pick-up solenoid
(SL2)
Multifeeder pick-up clutch
(CL3)
Pre-registration sensor (PS6)
Registration clutch (CL2)
Scanner motor (M2)

Figure 5-403

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

5-9

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

V. IDENTIFYING THE CASSETTE SIZE
When a cassette is set in the cassette holder, appropriate photointerrupters (Q651,
Q652, Q653, Q654) turn on or off.
The microprocessor on the DC controller PCB identifies the presence/absence of a
cassette based on the combinations of the photointerrupters which are either on or off
(Table 5-501); accordingly, the microprocessor controls where the scanner must be
reversed or when to execute blank exposure.
Arrangement
Q651

Cassette size

Q652

Q653

(Left)

No cassette

Q654

(right)

0

0

0

0

B5R

(182 × 257)

0

0

0

1

A4

(297 × 220)

0

0

1

0

A3

(297 × 420)

0

0

1

1

Mini (STMTR) 5.5" × 8.5"
(148 × 216)

0

1

0

0

Legal 8.5" × 14"
(356 × 216)

0

1

0

1

Letter 11" × 8.5"
(279 × 216)

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

A4R

(210 × 297)

Letter R 8.5" × 11"
(216 × 279)
A5R

(149 × 218)

1

0

0

1

A5

(218 × 149)

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

1

Mini-R (STMT) 8.5" × 5.5"
(216 × 148)
B5

(257 × 182)

1

1

0

0

B4

(364 × 257)

1

1

0

1

Ledger 11" × 17"
(182 × 257)

1

1

1

0

*U
(182 ~ 283 × 198 ~ 354)

1

1

1

1

(unit: mm)
1: photointerrupter is blocking light.
0: photointerrupter is not blocking light.
*size may be stored; must be within the range specified in mm; for details, see p. 1043.
Table 5-501

5-10

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

To change the cassette size, you must not only move the guide plate (horizontal,
vertical) inside the cassette to suit the copy paper but also move the paper size lever
located toward the front of the cassette (Figure 5-501) to the left or right so that the arrow
points to the appropriate paper size.
Caution:
A discrepancy between the size set by the paper size lever and the size of copy
paper will result in jams or soiling because of the wrong copying sequence.
Advise the user to be sure to match the size set by the paper size lever and the size
of copy paper.

Reference:
Paper size configurations differ from area to area; however, you may still make sure
of a specific copy control sequence for the size of paper that does not fall under the
respective category—the size, nevertheless, will not be indicated on the display.
For instance, you may use LTR paper for a metric model. (The paper size lever, in
this case, will be set to LTR.) This arrangement causes the copier to execute the
copying sequence intended for LTR copies.

Guide plate (horizontal)
Paper size lever

Guide plate (vertical)

Figure 5-501

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

5-11

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

VI. IDENTIFYING JAMS
As many as six (3 in the cassette feeding unit) are used to monitor the movement of
copy paper:
• registration sensor (PS6)
• separation sensor (PS7)
• delivery sensor (PS8)
A jam is identified in terms of the presence/absence of paper at the respective
sensors at such times as stored in the microprocessor.
The copier has a mechanism to remember how many copies remain to be made after
a jam and the current copy mode; it still retains such information even when it is deprived
of power by opening of the front cover.
The microprocessor has the jam detection sequence that is described below and,
further, identifies the presence of paper as detected by a sensor at power-on.
When the copier identifies a jam, it immediately stops the ongoing copying operation
and cuts off the power to the fixing heater (H1); at the same time, it flashes the Jam
indicator on the control panel and flashes also any of the location indicator.
The activation of the jam detection mechanism will not increment the copy count for
the copy which has jammed.

A. Pre-Registration Delay Jam
Copy paper does not reach the registration sensor (PS6) within a specific period of
time after the pick-up clutch (CL2) has gone on because of feeding problems.
Copy Start key
ON
STBY

Jam indicator
(flashing)

INTR

SCFW

SCRV

SCFW

Pck-up clutch (CL2)
1.5 sec

Jam check

1.5 sec
Normal

Error

Registration sensor (PS6)

Main motor (M1)

Figure 5-601 Pre-Registration Delay Jam Sequence

5-12

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

B. Pre-Registration Timing Jam
Copy paper reaches the registration sensor (PS6) before a specific period of time
after the pick-up clutch (CL2) has gone on because of feeding problems.
Copy Start key
ON
STBY

Jam indicator
(flashing)

INTR

SCFW

SCRV

SCFW

Pck-up clutch (CL2)
0.8 sec

0.8 sec

Jam check
Normal

Error

Registration sensor (PS6)

Main motor (M1)

Figure 5-602 Pre-Registration Timing Jam Sequence

C. Pre-Registration Stationary Jam
Copy paper does not move past the registration sensor (PS6) within a specific period
of time after the pick-up clutch (CL2) has turned on because of feeding problems.
Copy Start key
ON
STBY

Jam indicator
(flashing)

INTR

SCFW

SCRV

SCFW

SCRV

Pck-up clutch (CL2)
0.8 sec

0.8 sec

0.8 sec

Jam check
Normal

Normal

Error

Registration sensor (PS6)

Main motor

Figure 5-603 Pre-Registration Stationary Jam Sequence

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

5-13

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

D. Separation Delay Jam
Copy paper does not reach the separation sensor (PS7) within a specific period of
time after the registration clutch (CL1) has gone on because of feeding problems.
Jam indicator
(flashing)
SCFW

SCRV

SCFW

SCRV

Registration clutch (CL1)
1.1 sec

1.1 sec

Jam check
Normal

Error

Separation sensor (PS7)

Main motor (M1)

Figure 5-604 Separation Delay Jam Sequence

E. Separation Stationary Jam
Copy paper does not move past the separation sensor (PS7) within a specific period
of time after the registration clutch (CL1) has gone on because of feeding problems.
Jam indicator
(flashing)
SCFW

SCRV

SCFW

SCRV

Registration clutch (CL1)
0.3 sec

0.3 sec

Jam check
Normal

Error

Separation sensor (PS7)

Main motor (M1)

Figure 5-605 Separation Stationary Jam Sequence

5-14

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

F. Delivery Delay Jam
Copy paper does not reach the delivery sensor (PS8) within a specific period of time
after it has moved past the separation sensor (PS7) because of feeding problems.
Jam indicator
(flashing)
SCFW SCRV

SCFW

SCRV

LSTR

Separation sensor (PS7)
2.5 sec

2.5 sec

Jam check
Normal

Error

Delivery sensor (PS8)

Main motor (M1)

Figure 5-606 Delivery Delay Jam Sequence

G. Delivery Stationary Jam
Copy paper does not move past the delivery sensor within a specific period of time
after the delivery sensor (PS8) has gone on because of feeding problems.

Jam indicator
SCFW

SCRV

LSTR

Normal

Error

Delivery sensor (PS8)
*1

*1

Jam check

Main motor (M1)

Figure 5-607 Delivery Stationary Jam Sequence

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

5-15

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

VII. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
This section explains mechanical characteristics and describes how to
disassemble/assemble the machine.
Be sure to observe the following whenever disassembling/assembling the machine:
1. ! Disconnect the power plug before starting the work.
2. Unless otherwise shown, assemble the parts by reversing the steps given to
disassemble them.
3. Identify each screw by type (length, diameter) and location.
4. A washer is used for one of the mounting screws on the rear cover to protect against
static electricity; be sure to use the washer when assembling the part.
5. A washer is used for some mounting screws (for grounding wire, varistor) to ensure
correct electrical continuity; be sure to use the washer when assembling the part.
6. As a rule, do not operate the machine while any of its parts are removed.
7. When sliding out the duplexing unit or the fixing assembly, be sure to turn off the front
door switch or the power switch.

A. Pick-Up Assembly
1. Detaching the Pick-Up Roller Unit
1) Pull out the cassette.
2) Remove the stop ring q (plastic) from the front of the pick-up roller unit.

Figure 5-701

5-16

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

3) Open the lower right cover.
4) Remove the two screws w, and pull out the paper guide plate toward the front.

Figure 5-702
Note:
You will have sufficient access to the pick-up roller and the bushing at the rear in
this condition.
5) Push in the pick-up roller e from the direction of step 4) toward the rear, and remove
the bushing r while lowering it to the lower left.

Figure 5-703

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

5-17

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

Figure 5-704
6) Push in the bushing t at the rear toward the front, and lower the spring pressure to
remove the pick-up unit toward the left of the copier.

Figure 5-705
Note:
When removing the pick-up roller Assembly, separate the right side black bushing
from the key.

5-18

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

Figure 5-706
Caution:
Check that the paper registration sensor (PS 6) is properly seated after this
procedure is completed.
2. Detaching the Pick-Up Roller
1) Detach the pick-up roller unit. (See “1. Detaching the Pick-Up Roller Unit” on p. 514.)
2) Remove the E-ring q and the E-ring w; then, pull out the pick-up roller e together
with the collar.
Caution:
Take care not to drop the pin found toward the rear.

e
q
w
Figure 5-707

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

5-19

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

3. Points to Note When Attaching the Pick-Up Roller
When attaching the pick-up roller q, attach it so that the side w shown in Figure 5708 is toward the rear.

w

q

Figure 5-708
4. Detaching the Pick-Up Clutch
1) Detach the main motor unit. (See “1. Detaching the Main Motor Unit” on p. 7-11.)
2) Remove the two screws q, and detach the connector mount w.

Figure 5-709

5-20

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

3) Disconnect the connector e, and remove the clip ring r; then, detach the pick-up
clutch t.

Figure 5-710
5. Detaching the Separation Pad
1) Open the right door.
2) Remove the two screws q, and detach the separation cover w.

Figure 5-711

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

5-21

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

3) Remove the two screws e, and detach the separation pad unit r.

Figure 5-712
6. Adjusting the Left/Right Registration
Make adjustments so that the position of the image is as shown in Figure 5-714 when
the Test Sheet is copied in Direct.
a. Pick-Up from the Cassette
Turn the screw q shown in Figure 5-713 to adjust the position of the cassette hook
plate.
standard:
0 ±1.5 mm
clockwise turn:
moves the paper in the direction of – shown in Figure 5-714
counterclockwise turn: moves the paper in the direction of + shown in Figure 5-714
q

(-)

(+)
0±1.5mm

0
2
4
6
8
10

Figure 5-713

5-22

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

Figure 5-714

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

B. Multifeeder Assembly
1. Detaching the Multifeeder Assembly
1) Open the right door.
2) Remove the two screws q, and shift the multifeeder assembly w toward the front to
detach.

Figure 5-715

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

5-23

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

2.
1)
2)
3)

Detaching the Multifeeder Pick-Up Roller Unit
Open the right door.
Remove the E-ring q, and pull out the bushing w.
Remove the two screws e.

q
w
e

Figure 5-716
4) Remove the screw r, and detach the roller cover t.

t

r
Figure 5-717

5-24

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5) Shift the multifeeder pick-up roller unit y toward the rear to detach.

Figure 5-718
3. Detaching the Multifeeder Pick-Up Roller
1) Detach the multifeeder pick-up roller unit. (See “2. Detaching the Multifeeder Pick-Up
Roller Unit on p. 5-22.”)
2) Remove the stop ring q (plastic), and pull out the pick-up roller w together with the
collar.
Caution:
Take care not to drop the pin found at the rear.

q

w

Figure 5-719

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

5-25

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

4. Points to Keep Note When Attaching the Multifeeder Pick-Up Roller
When attaching the multifeeder pick-up roller q, make sure that the side with a cross
w on the collar is toward the rear.

2

1

(front of copier)

Figure 5-720
5. Detaching the Separation Pad
1) Open the upper right door.
2) Remove the two screws q, and detach the separation pad w.
Caution:
At this time, take care not to lose the spring on the separation pad assembly.

q

w
Figure 5-721

5-26

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

6. Detaching the Multifeeder Drive Unit
1) Detach the multifeeder assembly. (See “1. Detaching the Multifeeder Assembly on p.
5-21.”)
2) Detach the connector mount.
3) Remove the screw q.

Figure 5-722
4) Remove the screw w, and disconnect the connector e; then, detach the multifeeder
drive unit r.

Figure 5-723

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

5-27

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

7.
1)
2)
3)

Detaching the Multifeeder Clutch
Detach the multifeeder drive unit. (See “6. Multifeeder drive Unit on p. 5-25.”)
Remove the E-rings q w and screws e r t; then, detach the support mount.
Detach the multifeeder pick-up clutch y.

Figure 5-724

5-28

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

8. Positioning the Multifeeder Assembly (paper guide plate cam)
Temporarily fix the screw equipped with a hex nut on the spring clutch assembly, and
rotate the control ring. Make adjustments so that the hole in the cam and the hole in the
multifeeder drive unit match as shown in Figure 5-725 when the claw is engaged with the
solenoid plate; then, fix in position.

Figure 5-725

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

5-29

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

9. Adjusting the Left/Right Registration
If the right/left registration is not correct when copies are made using the multifeeder,
loosen the screw q, and adjust the position of the tray.

q
Figure 5-726
10. Points to Note When Attaching the Multifeeder Assembly Rack Plate
Attach the rack plate of the multifeeder to the pulley while both its right and left are
fully open.

5-30

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

C. Registration Roller Assembly
1. Detaching the Registration Clutch
1) Detach the connector cover or the lattice connector
2) Remove the clip ring q, and disconnect the connector w; then, detach the
registration clutch e.

Figure 5-727
2. Detaching the Upper Registration Roller
1) Detach the registration clutch. (See “1. Detaching the Registration Clutch on p. 529.”)
2) Remove the spring q (front) and spring w (rear).

Figure 5-728

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

5-31

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

Figure 5-729
Caution:
Take care not to misplace the springs (front, rear).

3) Lift the upper registration roller e to detach.

Figure 5-730

5-32

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

3. Detaching the Lower Registration Roller
1) Detach the upper registration roller. (See “2. Detaching the Upper Registration Roller
on p. 5-29.”)
2) Open the lower right door, and remove the two screws q to shift the pick-up guide
w toward the right side of the copier.

Figure 5-731
3) Remove the E-ring e (front), and shift the bushing r.
4) Detach the registration roller t.

Figure 5-732

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

5-33

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

D. Feeding Assembly
Be sure to detach the cartridge before detaching the feeding assembly.
1. Detaching the Feeding Belt
1) Detach the lower fixing unit. (See “8. Detaching the Lower Fixing Unit” on p. 6-23.)
2) Remove the three screws q, and shift the feeding retention plate w.

Figure 5-733
3) Disconnect the connector e, and shift the feeding retention plate w.

Figure 5-734

5-34

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

4) Detach the feeding spacer r by pulling it toward the fixing assembly.

Figure 5-735
5) Detach the static eliminator.
6) Detach the feeding spacer t from the hook (arrow).

Figure 5-736
Caution:
Take care not to touch the transfer roller. Do not damage the area where the
feeding spacers are in contact.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

5-35

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

E. Cassette Feeding Module
1. Detaching the Copier from the Cassette Feeding Module
1) Disconnect the copier’s power plug.
2) Disconnect the connector q of the cassette feeding module.

q

Figure 5-737
3) Hold the copier’s grips, and detach the copier from the cassette feeding module.
2. Detaching/Attaching the Pick-Up Roller
See p. 5-14 “1. Detaching the Pick-Up Roller Unit”, p. 5-17 “2. Detaching the Pick-Up
Roller” and p. 5-18 “3. Points to Note When Attaching the Pick-Up Roller.”
3.
1)
2)
3)

Detaching the Pick-Up Clutch
Detach the pick-up drive unit. (See p. 7-14 “1. Detaching the Pick-Up Drive Unit.”)
Detach the cassette motor. (See p. 7-15 “2. Detaching the Cassette Motor.”)
Remove the three screws q, and detach the bushing w and side plate e; then,
detach the pick-up clutch r.
r

w

e

q
Figure 5-738

5-36

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6
FIXING SYSTEM
This chapter explains the principles used to fuse toner images to transfer medium in view of the
functions of electrical and mechanical units and in relation to their timing of operation. It also shows
how these units may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted.

I.

BASIC OPERATIONS.........................6-1
A. Outline ...........................................6-1
B. Controlling the Fixing Heater
Temperature ..................................6-3
C. Controlling the Supply Power for
the Fixing Heater ...........................6-5
D. Detecting Overheating at the End
of the Fixing Heater .......................6-6

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

II.

E. Protection Mechanism ...................6-6
F. Correcting Displacement of the
Fixing Film .....................................6-7
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ......6-11
A. Fixing Assembly ............................6-11
B. Delivery Assembly .........................6-27

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

I. BASIC OPERATIONS
A. Outline
The drive roller of the fixing assembly is driven by the main motor (M1).
When the drive roller rotates, the fixing film rotates and, in conjunction, the pressure
roller rotates.
Part of the inside of the fixing film is heated by the fixing heater.
The temperature of the fixing heater is monitored by a thermistor (TH1), and the
result is sent to the microprocessor in the DC controller circuit in the form of the fixing
heater temperature detection signal (TH1).
Based on the result (TH1 signal), the microprocessor on the DC controller varies the
fixing heater drive signal (HTRD) to control the temperature of the fixing heater.
Further, a thermistor (TH2) is also provided on the end (rear) of the fixing heater to
monitor overheating.

Drive roller
M1 Main motor
Thermistor
Tension roller
Fixing film
Delivery roller

Fixing heater
Pressure roller

Fixing cleaning roller

Figure 6-101

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

6-1

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

+5V

Composite power supply PCB

Relay
(RL101)
PWSW*

Thermal fuse
FU1

Fixing heater
end temperature
detection

TH2

Fixing heater
end overheating
detection circuit

HTNG

TH2

Microprocessor

TH1

Fixing heater
H1
TH1
Fixing heater
temperature
etection

Fixing heater
overheating
detection circuit

HTRD

HTON*

Heater ON
detection PCB

Fixing heater driver PCB

DC controller PCB

Figure 6-102

6-2

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

B. Controlling the Fixing Heater Temperature
The fixing heater remains off while the copier is in standby state. To prevent fixing
faults caused by low temperature, its temperature is controlled in any of the following
three modes depending on the temperature at the time copying is started (as measured
by the main thermistor TH1) and the number of copies to be made in continuous mode:
a. If the temperature at the time copying is started is 140°C or more, it is controlled so
that it remains 180°C at all times.
• 1st to 100th copy
→
180°C
b. If the temperature at the time copying is started is 120°C or more and less than
140°C, it is controlled so that it remains between 200° and 180°C depending on the
number of copies to be made.
• 1st copy
→
200°C
• 2nd to 9th copy
→
195°C
• 10th to 20th copy
→
190°C
• 21st to 25th copy
→
185°C
• 26th to 100th copy
→
180°C
c. If the temperature at the time copying is started is less than 120°C or less, the
temperature is controlled to 225°-180°C, 215°-180°C, or 200°-180°C selected by
service mode. (See the Service Handbook.)
■Control 1
• 1st to 4th copy
→
225°C
• 5th copy
→
220°C
• 6th copy
→
215°C
• 7th copy
→
210°C
• 8th copy
→
205°C
• 9th to 20th copy
→
200°C
• 21st to 25th copy
→
195°C
• 26th to 40th copy
→
190°C
• 41st to 45th copy
→
185°C
• 46th to 100th copy
→
180°C
■Control 2 (default)
• 1st to 4th copy
→
215°C
• 5th copy
→
210°C
• 6th copy
→
205°C
• 7th to 20th copy
→
200°C
• 21st to 25th copy
→
195°C
• 26th to 40th copy
→
190°C
• 41st to 45th copy
→
185°C
• 46th to 100th copy
→
180°C
■Control 3
• 1st to 20th copy
→
200°C
• 21st to 25th copy
→
195°C
• 26th to 40th copy
→
190°C
• 41st to 45th copy
→
185°C
• 46th to 100th copy
→
180°C

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

6-3

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

Reference:
Normally, control 2 is used. Use control 1 to increase the control temperature if a
fixing fault occurs; or use control 3 to lower the control temperature if offset occurs.
(See the p. 10-32.)

Figure 6-103

6-4

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

C. Controlling the Supply Power for the Fixing Heater
The temperature of the fixing heater is controlled by controlling the power supplied
to the fixing heater.
The resistance of the plane-shaped heater used as the fixing heater may show some
variation depending on which production lot it comes from.
For this reason, whenever you have replaced the copier’s heater, you must store the
resistance value in service mode (No. 304; see p. 10-31); this way, the microprocessor
on the DC controller PCB can exert proper control over power.
Caution:
The resistance of the fixing heater is stored in service mode at the time the copier
is shipped out of the factory; do not change it unless you have replaced the fixing
heater.

The power of the fixing heater is controlled by a phase power control method.
The microprocessor controls the output timing of the fixing heater drive signal
(HTRD) so that power that suits the target temperature of the fixing heater may be
supplied to the heater (potential control of the supply power).

HTRD

Supply power
to heater

Figure 6-104

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

6-5

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

D. Detecting Overheating at the End of the Fixing Heater
A sub thermistor (TH2) is provided at the end (rear) of the copier’s fixing heater to
monitor overheating.
This consideration to prevent damage to the fixing film caused by overheating of the
area where paper (smaller than B4) does not come into contact.
When TH2 registers 250°C or more, the distance between copies is increased to
facilitate discharge of heat by the fixing heater, thereby preventing overheating.
The copier continues to make copies maintaining such a distance even after TH2
registers a value lower than 250°C.
If the temperature further increases after the distance has been increased and if the
value reaches 260°C or more, the ongoing copying operation will be stopped and the
power will be cut off; at the times E001 information is stored. (See p. 10-109.)

E. Protection Mechanism
The copier is equipped with the following protective functions to prevent malfunction
of the fixing heater:
1. Thermistor (TH1, TH2)
1) The microprocessor on the DC controller monitors the voltage of the thermistor (TH1,
TH2); if it detects a high or low temperature error, it stops the power to the heater and
cuts off all the power. At the time, E000 thorugh E003 information is stored. (See p.
10-109.)
2) If the overheating detection circuit identifies that TH1 has registered 260°C or TH2
has registered 270°C for 0.3 sec or more, the heater error detection signal (HTNG)
turns off the relay (RL101) to stop power to the fixing heater and cut off all the power.
(See p. 10-109.)
Caution:
Be sure to disconnect the connector (J4) of the fixing heater and press the service
switch (SW301) on the DC controller when turning on the power.
2. Thermal Fuse (FU1)
If the temperature around the thermal fuse remains 226°C or more for a specific
period of time, the fuse melts to cut off the power to the fixing heater.
3. Heater ON Detection Circuit
The period of time during which the fixing heater drive signal (HTRD) remains off is
detected; if an error is found, the power is cut off and E004 information is stored at the
time.

6-6

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

F. Correcting Displacement of the Fixing Film
1. Outline
The fixing film at times becomes displaced toward the front or rear as it keeps
turning. To correct such displacement, the copier is equipped with a correction
mechanism.
The control is executed by the fixing film sensor (PS9), which detects the position of
the film, and the fixing film motor (M4), which physically corrects displacement.
Reference:
If you turn on the power by inserting the door switch actuator into the door switch
with the top body of the copier open, E007 will be detected, since the condition
prevents the fixing film from turning.

Fixing film posision signal (FFD)

Main motor drive command (MMD)

Fuser film motor drive command (FMD)

DC controller PCB

Main motor
driver PCB
Tension roller
M4
M1

Fixing film motor

Fixing film

Main motor

Fixing film sensor

(front)
Delivery
Driver roller
Fixing heater
Pressure roller

Figure 6-105

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

6-7

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

The fixing film sensor (PS9) is used to detect the position of the fixing film and found
at the end of the film.
The rear (sensor side) of the fixing film is provided with a cut as shown in Figure 6106 so that the fixing film sensor continuously goes on and off.
Normally, the on and off periods of the sensor are identical as long as the fixing film
remains centered.
If the film starts to become displaced toward the rear, however, the on period
becomes longer; the off period becomes longer if the film starts to be displaced toward
the front. (See Figure 6-107)
The DC controller monitors the on and off periods of the sensor and computes the
difference to correct the position of the fixing film.

5
(unit: mm)

142

Fixing film
(rear)

(front)
Tension roller
OFF
Drive roller
ON

Figure 6-106

Normal

ON
OFF

(rear)

ON
OFF

(front)

ON
OFF

Figure 6-107

6-8

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

Displacement of the fixing film is physically corrected by the fixing film motor (M4).
When it identifies displacement of the fixing film, the DC controller rotates the fixing
film motor to move the rear of the tension roller up and down, thereby moving the fixing
film to the center to correct the displacement.
When the fixing film becomes displaced toward the rear, the tension roller is moved
down to move the fixing film toward the front.
When the fixing film becomes displaced toward the front, on the other hand, the
tension roller is moved up to move the fixing film toward the rear.
The fixing film is positioned properly by repeating these operations as necessary. If
the film has become displaced so much that the mechanism fails to make adequate
correction, ‘E007’ is indicated on the display. (See p. 10-110.)

Fixing belt motor (M4)

Tension roller
(rear view)

displacement to the rear
displacement to the front

Figure 6-108

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

6-9

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

2. Controlling the Fixing Film Motor
The fixing film motor is a stepping motor, and is rotated by the drive signal FMD and
pulse signals FFA, FFA*, FFB, and FFB*.
When FMD is ‘1’, the drive voltage FFCA and FFBC are imposed; the motor starts
to rotate when pulses are applied to each phase in specific sequence.
The motor is rotated in reverse by applying these pulses in reverse order.

+24V

FMD

FFCA

FFCB

Microprocessor
(Q314)
FFA
M4

FFA*

FFB

FFB*

DC controller PCB

Figure 6-109

6-10

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

II. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
This section explains mechanical characteristics and describes how to
disassemble/assemble the machine.
Be sure to observe the following whenever disassemblig/assembling the machine:
1. ! Disconnect the power plug before starting the work.
2. Unless otherwise shown, assemble the parts by reversing the steps given to
disassemble them.
3. Identify each screw by type (length, diameter) and location.
4. A washer is used for one of the mounting screws on the rear cover to protect against
static electricity; be sure to use the washer when assembling the part.
5. A washer is used for some mounting screws (for grounding wire, varistor) to ensure
correct electrical continuity; be sure to use the washer when assembling the part.
6. As a rule, do not operate the machine while any of its parts are removed.
7. When sliding out the duplexing unit or the fixing assembly, be sure to turn off the front
door switch or the power switch.

A. Fixing Assembly
1. Construction1
q we r

t yu
q
w
e
r

Drive roller
t Fixing cleaning roller
Cleaning brush
y Lower fixing roller
Fixing film
u Fixing heater
Tension roller
Figure 6-201

Caution:
The fixing film is made of special material; do not touch it or soil it.
If you must replace the upper fixing unit, replace it on a unit basis in the field and
leave component replacement to the workshop.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

6-11

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

2. Detaching the Upper Fixing Unit
1) Open the copier’s front cover.
2) Open the copier’s top body.
3) Remove the two screws q, and detach the fixing assembly cover w.
q

w
Figure 6-202
4) Disconnect the four connectors e, and remove the screw r.
r

e

Figure 6-203

6-12

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

5) Open the fixing shutter t, and put the screw removed in step 4) into the hole y in
the front side plate.
y

t
Figure 6-204
6) Pull out the upper fixing unit toward the rear.
Caution:
Do not touch the fixing film.
3. Detaching the Fixing Film, Tension Roller, Drive Roller, Fixing Cleaning Brush,
and Fixing Heater Unit
Caution:
Before going through the steps, make sure that the heater and the heater connector
have cooled sufficiently.
1) Detach the upper fixing unit. (See “2. Detaching the Upper Fixing Unit on p. 6-12.”)
2) Remove the screw q, and detach the heater connector w (front).
Caution:
If you are removing the screw q, you must first make sure that the heater connector
has cooled.
The screw q is a special screw; take care not to drop it.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

6-13

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

q

w
Figure 6-205
3) Remove the two E-rings e and the two washers r.
4) Remove the screw t.
er

t
Figure 6-206

6-14

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

5) Release the pressure by positioning the screw t as shown in Figure 6-207.
6) Remove the screw y, and detach the bushing u.
y
u
t

Figure 6-207
7) Remove the screw i, and detach the bushing o; then, detach the upper fixing top
side plate !0.
i

!0

o
Figure 6-208

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

6-15

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

8) Release the pressure by positioning the screw y and the bushing (rear) as shown in
Figure 6-209.

y

!1

Figure 6-209
9) Pull out the fixing film !2 toward the front.
10) Detach the tension roller !3.
!2

!3
Figure 6-210

6-16

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

11) Remove the screw !4, and detach the fixing film sensor !5.
!5

!4

Figure 6-211
12) Remove the E-ring !6.
!6

Figure 6-212

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

6-17

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

13) Remove the washer !7 and the bushing !8, and detach the drive roller !9.
!9

!7

!8

Figure 6-213
14) Life the delivery side, and detach the fixing cleaning brush @0.

@0

Figure 6-214
15) Remove the two screws @1, and detach the cover @2.
@2
@1

Figure 6-215
6-18

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

16) Remove the two screws @3, and detach the fixing film motor unit @4.
@3

@4
Figure 6-216
17) Remove the screw @5, and detach the cover @6.
18) Remove the screw @7, and disconnect the heater connector @8.
Caution:
If you are removing the screw @7, you must first make sure that the heater connector
has cooled.
The screw @7 is a special screw; take care not to lose it.
19) Remove the C-ring @9, and detach the bushing #0, leaving the fixing heater behind.

@9

#0
@8
@7

@6

@5
Figure 6-217

Caution:
Do not touch the surface of the heater.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

6-19

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

4. Points to Note When Attaching the Fixing Film
• Make sure that the cut off is toward the rear.
• Make sure that the front side is aligned with the groove of the heater.

Film edge

Figure 6-218
5. Points to Note When Attaching the Heater Connector
• When attaching the heater connector to the fixing heater, take care not to damage the
heater.
• When tightening the screw, hold the connector taking care that its top and bottom are
free of pressure; be careful not to tighten the screw excessively.

Screw

Heater connector

Figure 6-219

6-20

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

6. Points to Note When Replacing the Fixing Upper Unit
• If you have replaced the upper fixing unit, you must store the resistance of the heater
in service mode (No. 304; see p. 10-31.)
Caution:
Do not touch the surface of the heater.
7. Adjusting the Fixing Film Drive Roller Pressure
If a fixing fault occurs, be sure to go through the following to adjust the pressure of
the drive roller.
1) Detach the fixing cover.
2) Detach the inside cover of the copier’s front side.
3) Close the copier’s upper body, and insert the door switch actuator.
4) Press the service mode switch (SW302).
• The copier enters service mode, and the display indicates ‘1’.
5) Press ‘4’ on the keypad.
• The display indicates ‘4’.
6) Press the AE key.
• The copier enters operation check mode, and the display indicates ‘401’.
7) Press ‘5’ on the keypad.
• The display indicates ‘405’.
8) Press the Start key.
• The copier enters fixing film initial rotation mode (405) to return the fixing film to its
proper position.
• The fixing film stops automatically as soon as it reaches its proper position.
• The copier indicates the position of the film in the copy density indicator.
9) Open the copier’s top body.
10) Check that the arrow q is at the middle of the memory as shown in Figure 6-220.

q

Figure 6-220 (rear view)
11) Close the copier’s top body, and activate service mode.
12) Press ‘4’ on keypad; when the display indicates ‘4’, press the AE key.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

6-21

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

13) Press ‘4’ on the keypad; when the display indicates ‘404’, press the Start key.
• The copier enters fixing tension roller mode (404).
• The fixing tension roller becomes fixed, and the fixing film rotates idly.
• The count indicator indicates how long the fixing film sensor has remained on.
Caution:
If the copy count indicator keeps indicating ‘0’ or ‘528’ during adjustment,
immediately press the Stop key to de-activate service mode.
If the copy countis ‘180’ or higher and ‘348’ or lower and has not changed, go to step
17). Or, if 10’s and 100’s do not change, go to step 17);
14) Loosen the fixing screw w slightly; i.e., move it to the left about 1 mm.
15) Turn the adjusting screw e so that the copy count is ‘180’ or higher’ and ‘348’ or
lower.
Caution:
Adjust so that 10’s and 100’s will not change; ignore 1’s may change ±5.)
• A clockwise turn decreases the reading.
• A counterclockwise turn increases the reading.

w

e

Figure 6-221
16) When the reading in the copy counter is appropriately correct, tighten the screw w;
make sure that the reading is appropriate after tightening the screw.
17) Press the Start key.
• The copier enters check mode (404), and the fixing film rotates idly for about 2.5
min; check that the fixing film has not shifted from the adjusted position.
• The copy count indicator indicates “
” or “
”; if “
” is indicated, repeat steps
starting with 13).
If “
” is indicated, repeat steps 4) through 10).
18) Attach the cover.

6-22

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

8. Detaching the Lower Fixing Unit
1) Detach the delivery roller. (See “1. Detaching the Delivery Roller.” on p. 6-28.)
2) Detach the delivery cover.
3) Remove the screw q, and detach the fixing shutter open/close block w.

Figure 6-222
4) Remove the E-ring e, and detach the lower fixing unit r.

Figure 6-223
Caution:
Do not touch the surface of the fixing cleaning roller or the lower fixing roller.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

6-23

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

9. Detaching the Separation Claw/Lower Fixing Claw and Fixing Cleaning Roller
1) Detach the front door.
2) Remove the screw q, and detach the separation claw unit w.

e
Figure 6-224
3) Detach the separation claw e from the separation claw unit.
Caution:
Take care not to misplace the spring.
4) Detach the lower fixing roller r together with the bushing t.

r

e

Figure 6-225

6-24

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

5) Detach the bushing y found at the front, and detach the HIGH-TEMPERATURE
WARNING cover u.

·
·····
········
· ····
·····
········
· ····
··
·· ·
········
····

·
·····
········
····

u

y

Figure 6-226
6) Lift the fixing cleaning roller to detach.
10. Adjusting the Lower Fixing Roller Nip
If fixing faults occur, make the following adjustments.
The nip is correct if as shown below; otherwise, turn the bolt to make adjustments.
c

A4 size
Feeding
direction

b Center of paper

a
b : 4±1mm
| a-c | : 1mm or less

Figure 6-227
Note:
a and c represent points 10 mm from both ends of copy paper.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

6-25

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

a. Measuring the Nip
Measure the nip immediately after turning on the copier before the beginning of a
work day.
1) Open the copyboard cover, and make a solid black copy in A4.
2) Place the copy in the multifeeder with the solid black face up.
3) Press the service mode switch (SW302) using a hex key.
• The copier enters service mode, and the display indicates ‘1’.
4) Press ‘4’ on the keypad.
• The display indicates ‘4’.
5) Press the AE key.
• The copier enters operation/check mode, and the display indicates ‘401’.
6) Press ‘6 on the keypad.
• The display indicates ‘406’.
7) Press the Start key.
• The above operations cause the multifeeder to pick up paper so that you can take
measurements as in Figure 6-227; the paper will then be discharged.
Reference:
The copy paper stops while it is half way under the fixing roller; and, about 10 sec
later, it will be automatically discharged.
8) Measure the nip.

6-26

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

B. Delivery Assembly
1.
1)
2)
3)

Detaching the Delivery Roller
Open the copier’s top body.
Remove the E-ring q.
Shift the bushing w (rear) and bushing e (front); then, detach the delivery roller r.

Figure 6-228

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

6-27

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

6-28

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAR. 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 7
EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
This chapter shows the copier’s external parts, and explains the principles used for the copier’s
various control mechanisms in view of the functions of electrical and mechanical units and in relation
to their timing of operation. It also shows how these units may be disassembled/assembled and
adjusted.

I.

II.

POWER SUPPLY ...............................7-1
A. Outline ...........................................7-1
B. Power Supply Circuit Assembly.....7-2
C. Detecting Errors in the Power
Supply PCB ...................................7-4
D. Protection Mechanisms for the
Power Supply Circuit .....................7-5
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ......7-6
A. External Covers .............................7-6

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.

Control Panel.................................7-9
Fans...............................................7-10
Main Motor/Main Drive Assembly..7-11
Cassette unit .................................7-14
DC Controller PCB ........................7-17
Composite Power Supply PCB......7-18
AE Sensor PCB.............................7-21
Intensity Sensor PCB ....................7-21

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

I. POWER SUPPLY
A. Outline

Figure 7-101
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-1

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

B. Power Supply Circuit Assembly
The copier’s power supply assembly is a composite power supply circuit which uses
a single main transformer (T101) as the source of DC power, high-voltage power, and
power for the fluorescent lamp.
AC power is supplied to the DC power supply assembly when the power switch
(SW829) and the door switch are turned on.
When the power switch on the control panel is pressed, signals are sent to the
composite power supply assembly to generate internal power supply +5 Vin.
In response, the microprocessor (Q512) turns on to turn on relays RL101 and RL501
to supply power.
The DC power supply generates +34 V, +24 V, and +5 V.
When the power switch is pressed for a second time, the microprocessor turns off
RL501 and the main transformer; thereafter, it turns off Q503 to turn off RL101, thereby
cutting off +5 Vin.
The condition deprives the DC controller circuit of DC power; to compensate for the
absence of power, a lithium battery (BAT301) is provided to back up the data in the RAM
(Q307) in the DC controller circuit.
Caution:
Voltage is supplied up to the AC power supply even when the power is off.

! Caution:

Replace the lithium battery only with the one listed in the Parts Catalog. Use of a
different battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a
fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble, or
dispose of it in fire.
Keep the battery out of reach of children and discare any used battery promptly.
Reference:
The tolerances for the DC voltage are as follows:
• +34 V ±20%
• +24 V ±5%
• + 5 V ±5%
However, the above applies only when the error in the AC input is limited to ±10%.

7-2

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

Figure 7-102

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-3

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

C. Detecting Errors in the Power Supply PCB
The microprocessor (Q512) on the composite power supply PCB either displays an
error message on the display by communicating with the DC controller or flashes
LED501 to indicate the presence of an error if any of the following is identified.
1. Communication Error between DC Controller PCB and Composite Power
Supply PCB
If an error occurs in the communication between the DC controller PCB and the
composite power supply PCB, E240 is indicated as soon as it is detected by the
microprocessor on the DC controller PCB. If an error is detected by the composite power
supply, the LED is flashed at intervals of 5 sec.
2. Error in the High-Voltage Output Data
If the difference between the setting associated with the high voltage generated by
the microprocessor (Q512) on the composite power supply PCB and the control value is
greater than the specified value, the microprocessor (Q512) sends error data to the DC
controller PCB, which in turn indicates E064.
3. Low-Voltage Output Data Error
If the difference between the setting associated with the low voltage generated by the
microprocessor (Q512) on the composite power supply PCB and the control value is
greater than the specified value, the microprocessor (Q512) communicates with the DC
controller PCB, which in turn indicates E803.
4. Overcurrent in the Low-voltage Power Supply
If the composite power supply PCB identifies overcurrent because of an error in a DC
load or wire is trapped, the LED is flashed at intervals of 2 sec for 20 sec.
Reference:
Normally, the LED is flashing at intervals of 0.5 sec.

7-4

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

D. Protection Mechanisms for the Power Supply Circuit
The composite power supply PCB is equipped with an overcurrent detection circuit;
if a short circuit occurs in a load for some reason, the protection mechanism is activated
to stop the output.
When the output is cut out, you may reset the output by opening the front door to turn
off the door switch, correcting the load, and turning on the door switch and power switch
(SW829) once again.
Caution:
Be sure to disconnect the connector (J4) of the fixing heater before resetting the
output.
Repeated short circuiting and resetting can cause the built-in fuse (FU101) to blow.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-5

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

II. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
This section explains mechanical characteristics and describes how to
disassemble/assemble the machine.
Be sure to observe the following whenever disassemblig/assembling the machine:
1. ! Disconnect the power plug before starting the work.
2. Unless otherwise shown, assemble the parts by reversing the steps given to
disassemble them.
3. Identify each screw by type (length, diameter) and location.
4. A washer is used for one of the mounting screws on the rear cover to protect against
static electricity; be sure to use the washer when assembling the part.
5. A washer is used for some mounting screws (for grounding wire, varistor) to ensure
correct electrical continuity; be sure to use the washer when assembling the part.
6. As a rule, do not operate the machine while any of its parts are removed.
7. When sliding out the duplexing unit or the fixing assembly, be sure to turn off the front
door switch or the power switch.

A. External Covers

q
w
e
r

7-6

Copyboard cover
t
Left cover
y
Delivery cover
u
Copyboard
i
Figure 7-201

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

Control panel
Front door
Cassette
Upper left cover

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

o Right cover
!2 Lower right cover
!0 Upper rear cover
!3 Lower right back
!1 Rear cover
Figure 202 cover
Note:
Detach the covers when cleaning, inspecting, or repairing the inside of the copier
as necessary.
Covers that may be detached merely by removing their respective mounting screws
are omitted from the discussion.
Caution:
When attaching the rear cover, be sure that the harness is housed inside the upper
rear cover so that its portion shown in the diagram will not spring out the cover or
the harness will not come into contact with the connector plate.

Figure 7-203

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-7

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

When attaching the copyboard glass, make sure that it is firmly in contact with the
vertical size plate without a gap to prevent intrusion of foreign matter.

Figure 7-204

7-8

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

B. Control Panel
1. Detaching the Control Panel
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)

Detach the copyboard glass.
Detach the upper left cover.
Open the front door.
Pull the copier’s open/close lever to open the copier.
Detach the upper rear cover.
Detach the right cover.
Detach the left cover.
Remove the five screws q, and detach the inside cover w.

Figure 7-205
9) Disconnect the two connectors r (J309, J310) on the DC controller PCB; then,
detach the control panel t.

Figure 7-206

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

Figure 7-207

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-9

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

C. Fans
1. Detaching the Exhaust Fan
1)
2)
3)
4)

Open the front door.
Pull the copier’s open/close lever to open the copier.
Detach the DC controller PCB. (See “1. Detaching the DC Controller PCB” on p. 7-17.)
Remove the screw q at the copier’s rear, and remove the two screws w at the front.

q

w

Figure 7-208

Figure 7-209

5) Pull out the exhaust fan assembly e toward the front while supporting it.

e

Figure 7-210
6) Remove the four screws r, and detach the exhaust fan t.
r

t

r

Figure 7-211
7-10

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

D. Main Motor/Main Drive Assembly
1. Detaching the Main Motor Unit
1) Detach the rear cover.
2) Disconnect the two connectors q, and remove the three screws w; then, detach the
main motor unit e.

Figure 7-212
2. Detaching the Main Drive Assembly
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)

Open the front door.
Pull out the drum cartridge.
Detach the multifeeder unit.
Detach the rear cover.
Detach the main motor.
Remove the clip ring q, and disconnect the connector w; then, detach the
registration clutch e.

Figure 7-213

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-11

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

7)

Remove the screw r, and detach the composite power supply support plate t.

Figure 7-214
8) Detach the belt from the belt tensioner y of the fixing drive assembly.

Figure 7-215
9) Turn the pulley i clockwise, and detach the belt o.

Figure 7-216
7-12

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

10) Remove the E-ring !0 and clip ring !1; then, detach the bushing !2. In this condition,
detach the gear and pulley !3 from the main drive assembly.

Figure 7-217
3. Routing the Drive Belt
Route the drive belt attaching them to the pulley and the tensioner as shown in
Figure 4-218.

Figure 7-218

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-13

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

E. Cassette unit
1. Detaching the Pick-Up Drive Unit
1) Detach the rear cover and right cover.
2) Remove the screw q.
q

Figure 7-219
3) Remove the screw w, and detach the harness guide e.

w
e

Figure 7-220

7-14

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

4) Remove the four screws r, and disconnect the two connectors t; then, detach the
pick-up drive unit y.
r

t

t

r

y

r
Figure 7-221

2. Detaching the Cassette Motor
1) Detach the rear cover.
2) Remove the two screws q, and disconnect the connector w (J114); then, detach the
motor e.
q

e w

q

Figure 7-222

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-15

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

3. Detaching the Cassette Driver PCB
1) Detach the rear cover.
2) Disconnect all connectors from the cassette driver PCB q.
3) Remove the three screws w, and detach the driver PCB q.

w
q

Figure 7-223

7-16

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

F. DC Controller PCB
1. Detaching the DC Controller PCB
1) Disconnect the connector of the DC controller.
2) Remove the four screws q, and detach the DC controller PCB together with its
mount.

Figure 7-224
2. Points to Note When Replacing the DC Controller PCB
• When sending the DC controller PCB to the workshop or factory, put it in a conducting
bag while keeping it intact with the mount. Use a conducting bag whose one side is
transparent, and make sure that the face of the DC controller PCB shows through the
transparent side of the bag.
• After replacement, perform following; see p. 7-20:
q enter the value recorded on the service label;
w adjust the multifeeder paper width sensor;
e adjust the intensioy of the scanning lamp; and
r adjust AE.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-17

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

G. Composite Power Supply PCB
1.
1)
2)
3)

Detaching the Composite Power Supply PCB
Detach the lower rear cover and the delivery cover.
Remove the screw q, and detach the switch support plate w.
Remove the screw e, and detach the power cord cover 1 r.

Figure 7-225

4) Remove the screw t, and shift the power cord cover 2 y.
5) Disconnect the AC connector u, and remove the screw i to detach the grounding
wire o.

Figure 7-226

7-18

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

6) Remove the three screws !0, and detach the power cord mount !1.

Figure 7-227
7) Disconnect all connectors from the composite power supply PCB.
8) Remove the screw !2, and detach the grounding wire !3; then, detach the harness
guide !4 from the power supply side plate.

Figure 7-228
9) Remove the screw !5, and detach the composite power supply PCB !6.

Figure 7-229
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-19

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

2. Points to Note When Handling the Composite Power Supply PCB
• Some capacitors used on the PCB may retain charges even when the copier remains
off. For this reason, you must take care never to short the terminals of the capacitor
whenever you have detached the PCB.
• Enter the settings (Nos. 315 through 318) recorded on the label attached to the
composite power supply (service part) in service mode. (See p. 10-103)

7-20

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

H. AE Sensor PCB
1. Points to Note When Replacing the AE Sensor
• After replacement, perform the following; see p. 10-11:
q Adjust AE.

I. Intensity Sensor PCB
1. Points to Note When Replacing the Intensity Sensor
• After replacement, perform the following; see p. 10-11:
q Adjust the intensity of the scanning lamp; and
w Adjust AE.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

7-21

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

7-22

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAR. 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 8
INSTALLATION
This chapter introduces requirements for the site of installation, and shows how the copier may be
installed using step-by-step instructions.

I.
II.

III.
IV.

SELECTING THE SITE ......................8-1
UNPACKING AND INSTALLING
THE COPIER......................................8-2
A. Unpacking and Removing
Fixings ...........................................8-2
B. Turning On the Copier ...................8-5
C. Checking the Images and
Operations .....................................8-8
D. Attaching the Drum Unit ................8-9
E. Changing the Cassette Size..........8-10
RELOCATING THE COPIER..............8-13
REPLACING THE DRUM UNIT .........8-14

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

V.

INSTALLING THE CONTROL CARD
IV N.....................................................8-17
VI. CASSETTE HEATER KIT 5
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ...........8-19
A. Unpacking......................................8-19
B. Installation (to a Cassette
Feeding Module-A2/B2).................8-20
VII. INSTALLING THE REMOTE
DIAGNOSTIC DEVICE II....................8-26
A. Unpacking......................................8-26
B. Installation to the Copier ...............8-27

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

I. SELECTING THE SITE
Keep the following in mind when selecting the site of installation; if possible, pay a
visit to the user’s before the delivery of the machine.
1. The site must provide a power outlet that may be used exclusively for the machine
and that meets the rating ±10%.
2. The site must be 7.5°C/45.5°F to 30°C/86.0°F in temperature and 10% RH to 80%
RH in humidity. In particular, avoid areas near water faucets, boilers, humidifiers, or
refrigerators.
3. Avoid areas near sources of fire, areas subject to dust or ammonium gas, or areas
exposed to the direct rays of the sun; if necessary, provide curtains to shut out the
sun.
4. The site must be well ventilated.
5. Make sure that the floor will remain in contact with the copier’s feet and will keep the
copier level.
6. Make sure that there will be work space that meets the measurements shown in
Figure 8-101; in other words, there must be distances A and B around the copier
when measured with its front door open.

B

A

A

A

A: 50cm/ 19.7in
B: 10cm/ 3.9in

Figure 8-101

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-1

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

II. UNPACKING AND INSTALLING THE COPIER
When a metal part is brought in from a cold to warm environment, droplets of water
can develop on the surface of the part. This phenomenon is called condensation, and
condensation in a copier can lead to faulty images. If the copier has been moved from a
cold to warm place, leave it alone for about one hour or more before unpacking it.

A. Unpacking and Removing Fixings
Step

Work

Remarks

1

Unpack the copier.

2

Detach the plastic cover, and
place the copier on the
pedestal holding its grips; be
sure to work in a group of two.
Install the Cassette Feeding
Module-B2 or -A2 (accessory)
according to its Installation
Procedure if the copier is to be
placed on it.

3

Open the cardboard box, and
take out all the accessories.

Check that none of the following accessories is missing:
• Copy tray
• Installation Procedure
• Cassette (Universal) • Operator’s Manual

4

Remove all tape from the
outside of the copier. Take out
the cassette from the cardboard
box, and remove the cushions
from inside the cassette; then,
slide the cassette into the copier.

Make sure that the paper size plate and size label
(1 pc. each) is inside the cassette.

5

Remove the tape from the
scanner fixing found on the
outside of the left cover,
remove the screw, and slide the
fixing to the right to detach it to
the front.
• Keep the fixing stored for
possible relocation of the
machine.

8-2

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

Work

Step

Remarks

6

Open the copyboard cover,
and remove the protective
sheet.

7

Open the front cover, and push
the lever found on the left side
up in the direction of the arrow
to open the copier’s top body.

8

Pull up the spacer (front and
rear, 1 pc. each) of the fixing
roller in the direction of the
arrow until a click is heard.

9

Remove the two pieces of
cardboard (cushion) from the
feeding assembly.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-3

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

Step

Work

10

Pull the developing locking
lever toward the front, and turn
it clockwise to release it.

11

Remove the knob, and remove
the dummy drum from the
copier. (Keep the knob for
later.)

12

Remove the screw, and
remove the developing
assembly stopper.

13

Remove the developing
assembly, and check that the
developing cylinder is free of
scratches or dirt.

14

Install the developing assembly, and attach the developing
assembly stopper with a screw.

15

Engage the developing
assembly.

16

Close the copier’s top unit.

8-4

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

Remarks

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

B. Turning On the Copier
Step

Work

1

Connect the power plug to the
power outlet.

Remarks

2

Turn on the power switch.

3

Turn off the power switch.

4

Supply toner according to the
instructions given on the toner
supply label attached behind
the front door.

5

Release the developing
assembly by the developing
assembly locking lever.

6

Install the drum unit.

7

Lock the developing assembly,
and close the copier’s top unit.

8

Insert the door switch activator
into the door switch, and turn
on the power.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

Caution:
• Make sure that the power outlet is the rating
±10%.
Make sure that the Add Paper message flashes.
• Press the keypad and the Clear key to make
sure that the copy count indication is correct.

Caution:
When turning the toner cartridge counterclockwise to set it, you must fully turn it until it is
locked; the developing assembly can cause a
fault if you operate the machine without locking
the cartridge.

See “D. Attaching the Drum Unit.”

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-5

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

Step

Work

9

Select service mode No.
313/314, and enter the settings
recorded on the drum label.
To select service mode,
• Press the service mode
switch (SW302) with a hex
key.
Select ‘3’ of the mode by
pressing ‘3’ on the keypad
and AE key; then, select ‘No.
3 xx’ by pressing ‘x’ and ‘x’
on the keypad and the start
key.

Remarks

To enter settings,
• Select ‘No. 313’ in service mode, and enter the
setting recorded on the label (PRIMARY) using
the keypad. (To enter ‘-’, press the % key before
entering the setting.)
Then, press the Start key to store the setting.
To enter the setting for IP_OFST, select ‘No. 314’
in service mode and work in the same way.
10

Execute ‘No. 401’ in service
mode.
• Press the service mode
switch (SW302), ‘4’ on the
keypad, AE Key, and Start
key in sequence.

11

Make sure that step 10 has
been completed; then, turn off
the power, and open the
copier’s top unit.

12

Remove the static eliminator,
and clean it with the static
eliminator brush; then, set the
static eliminator.

8-6

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

The copier supplies toner from the toner container
to the developing assembly (about 5 min).

Caution:
• Do not turn off the power or remove the door
switch actuator while the machine is operating.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

Work

Step

Remarks

13

Turn on the power.

14

Execute ‘No. 412’ in service
mode.
• Press the service mode
swicth (SW302), ‘4’ on the
keypad, AE key, ‘1’ and ‘2’ on
the keypad, and Start key in
sequence.

15

Set the settings for user mode
and settings mode in service
mode to suit the needs of the
user.

16

Tailor the cassette to suit the
desired size by operating the
size guide plate and size
detecting lever; then, attach
the size label.

See “E. Changing the Size.”

17

Put copy paper in the cassette,
and set the cassette in the
copier.

• Make sure that the Add Paper message turns off.
• Make sure that the paper indicator matches with
the APVC value; it stops in about 23 sec.
size of the cassette.
• Press the keys on the control panel other than
the Copy Start key to make sure that all
respective operations are normal.

18

Attach the copy tray.

19

Remove the door switch activator, and close the front door.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

The copier automatically sets the APVC value; it
stops in about 23 sec.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-7

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

C. Checking the Images and Operations
Step

Work

Check/Remarks

1

Place the Test Sheet on the
copyboard, and check the
copies.

• Make sure there is no abnormal sound.
• Check the copy images for each standard
reproduction ratio.
• Make sure that as many copies as specified are
made normally.
• If the copy image is faulty, perform the “Image
Adjustment Basic Procedure.”

2

Make copies in manual mode.

Make sure that the copying operation is normal.

3

Make sure that the external
covers are free from scratches
and deformations.

4

Clean the area around the
copier.

5

Move the machine to its site of
installation.

8-8

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

Make sure that the copier is more or less level.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

D. Attaching the Drum Unit
Work

Step

Check/Remarks

1

Unpack the drum unit, and
remove the light-blocking
sheet.

2

Remove the primary charging
roller releasing spacer.
Releasing spacer
Releasing spacer

Take care not to damage the surface of the drum
and not to touch the primary charging roller.
3

Set the drum unit to the copier,
and fix it in position using the
knob used to keep the dummy
drum.

Be sure to insert the drum unit straight along the
copier’s rail.
4

Fill out the label, and attach it
to the drum unit cover.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-9

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

E. Changing the Cassette Size
Change the cassette size to suit the user’s needs.
1) Slide the cassette out of the copier.
2) Move the length plate inside the cassette to suit the length of the paper size.

A5
STMT

A4R

LTR R

B5R

MTR
LTR ST /A5R
A4

Figure 8-201
3) Move the width plate inside the cassette to suit the width of the paper to be used.

A5
STMT

A4R

LTR R

B5R

MTR
LTR ST /A5R
A4

Figure 8-202

8-10

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

4) Move the paper size lever found toward the front of the cassette so that it is aligned
with the size of the paper to be used.

U STMTRLTRR STM LGL LTR 11x17
A5R B5R A4R
A
B
B
A
A

Figure 8-203
Caution:
Failure to adjust the paper size lever will lead to jams or soiling.
5) Take out the paper size plates for the cassette, and pick out the four plates
representing the most frequently used size; attach the labels.

A3

A4 R
A5 R

A4

Figure 8-204

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-11

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

6) Set the paper size plates selected in step 4).

After setting the size plate, make sure it corresponds to the paper size you have selected.

Figure 8-205
Caution:
If you are setting the plate for the position representing the universal (u) cassette,
you must perform the work described for “universal cassette paper size setting
(505); see p. 10-44.
■ Points to Note When Handling the Photosensitive Drum after Installation
The copier’s photosensitive drum is highly susceptible to light; mere exposure to
room light can affect the drum enough to produce white spots or black lines on the
copies. Keep the following in mind:
• Do not spend more than 5 min when removing jams.
• After detaching the drum unit from the copier during servicing work, be sure to
protect it in the light-blocking sheet that came with the drum or fresh copy paper,
and place the drum in a dark place.
Do not touch the photosensitive drum or primary charging roller.
If you have soiled the surface of the drum inadvertently, wipe it using a flannel cloth
coated with toner; do not use paper, lint-free or otherwise.
Do not dry wipe or use solvent to clean the drum.

8-12

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

III. RELOCATING THE COPIER
If you must relocate the copier by truck or using other means of transportation,
perform the following work:
Step

Work

1

Move the lens to the Direct
position.

2

Take out the drum unit.

3

Fix the scanner in place.

4

Tape the front door and delivery
assembly in place.

5

Place A3 copy paper on the
copyboard glass, and tape the
copyboard cover in place.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

Checks

Remarks

Direct position refers to
the position of the lens
after warm-up initiated
by power-on.
Put the drum unit in a
box for transport.
Use the fixing removed
at time of installation.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-13

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

IV. REPLACING THE DRUM UNIT
Go through the following when replacing the drum unit:
Step

Work

1

Turn off the copier, and open
the front door and the copier’s
top unit.

2

Release the developing
assembly, and remove the
knob to remove the drum unit.

3

Unpack the new drum unit, and
remove the light-blocking
sheet.

4

Remove the primary charging
roller releasing spacer.

Remarks

Releasing spacer
Releasing spacer

Take care not to damage the surface of the drum
and not to touch the primary charging roller.
5

8-14

Set the drum unit to the copier,
and attach the knob used to fix
the old drum unit.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

Work

Step

Remarks

6

Fill out the label, and attach it
to the drum unit cover.

7

Lock the developing assembly,
and close the copier’s top unit.

8

Turn on the door switch using
the door switch actuator; then,
shift the power switch to ‘ON’.

9

Select service mode No.
313/314, and enter the settings
recorded on the drum label.
To select service mode,
• Press the service mode
switch (SW302) with a hex
key.
Select ‘3’ of the mode by
pressing ‘3’ on the keypad
and AE key; then, select ‘No.
3 xx’ by pressing ‘x’ and ‘x’
on the keypad and the start
key.
To enter settings,
• Select ‘No. 313’ in service mode, and enter the
setting recorded on the label (PRIMARY) using
the keypad. (To enter ‘-’, press the % key before
entering the setting.)
Then, press the Start key to store the setting.
To enter the setting for IP_OFST, select ‘No. 314’
in service mode and work in the same way.

10

Turn off the power, and open
the copier’s top unit.

11

Replace the static eliminator.

12

Turn on the power.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-15

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

Step

Work

13

Execute ‘No. 412’ in service
mode.
• Press the service mode
swicth (SW302), ‘4’ on the
keypad, AE key, ‘1’ and ‘2’ on
the keypad, and Start key in
sequence.

14

Remove the door switch actuator, and close the front door.

8-16

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

Remarks
The copier automatically sets the APVC value; it
stops in about 23 sec.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

V. INSTALLING THE CONTROL CARD IV N
Caution:
Be sure to disconnect the copier’s power plug before starting the installation work.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)

Open the front cover
Open the copier’s top body by operating its open/close lever.
Detach the front cover.
Take out the cartridge.
Detach the inside cover.
Loosen the screw on the upper rear cover.
Loosen the two screws on the copyboard glass.
Detach the face plate q from the control card cable inlet.

detaching the face plate q, detach it in the direction of the arrow using
( When
)
pliers or screwdriver.

Figure 8-501
9) Fix the Control Card IV N to the copier using a screw w (M4×12); at the time, be use
that the copier’s emboss e is fitted in the hole in the Control Card IV N.

e
w

Figure 8-502
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-17

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

10) Disconnect the copier’s dummy connector r.

r
Figure 8-503
11) Connect the connector t of the Control Card IV N.

t

Figure 8-504
12) Connect the copier’s power plug, and turn on its power switch to check the operation
of the Control Card IV N.

8-18

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

VI. CASSETTE HEATER KIT 5 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
A. Unpacking
Open the shipping box, and check to make sure that none of the parts shown in Fig.
8-601 is missing.

Figure 8-601
q
w
e
r

Cassette Heater ...............................1
Mounting plate 1 ..............................1
Mounting plate 2 ..............................1
Relay harness ..................................1

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

t Cord clamp ......................................1
y Binding screw (black; M4×6) ...........2
u TP screw (white; M3×6)...................2

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-19

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

B. Installation (to a Cassette Feeding Module-A2/B2)
1) Remove the cassettes and all rear covers from the cassette feeding unit/pedestal.
2) Remove the copier’s rear cover.
3) Install the mounting plate 2 to the cassette heater with two screws (black; M4×6).

Mounting plate 2

Screw

Cassette heater

Figure 8-602

8-20

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

4) Insert the bend found at the rear of the heater into the heater mounting slit in the rear
side plate of the cassette feeding unit/pedestal (bottom holder).

Figure 8-603
5) Open the cover on the front of the cassette feeding unit/module, and fix the mounting
plate 2 in place to the front side plate with two screws (white; M3×6).

Screws

Figure 8-604

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-21

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

6) Close the cover.
7) Connect the connector on the relay harness to the connector of the cassette heater
(rear side plate of the cassette feeding unit). (Connect the side where the harness
is bundled with a tie-wrap.)

Tie-wrap

Connector
Cord clamp

Figure 8-605
8) Install the cord clamp to the hole in the rear side plate of the cassette feeding
unit/pedestal.
• Cassette Feeding Module-A2

Cord clamp

Figure 8-606

8-22

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

• Cassette Feeding Module-B2

Cord clamp

Figure 8-607
9) Lead the other connector on the relay harness through the copier’s bottom plate as
shown.

Copier's connector
Molded member

Copier's base plate

Figure 8-608

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-23

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

10) Connect the connector on the relay harness with the copier’s connector.

Relay harness

Figure 8-609
11) Fix the relay harness in place to the rear side plate with the cord clamp.
• Cassette Feeding Module-A2

Figure 8-610
Caution:
Make sure that the relay harness is outside the area indicated by dashed lines to
prevent it from interfering with the feet of the cassette.

8-24

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

• Cassette Feeding Module-B2

Figure 8-611
Caution:
Make sure that the relay harness is outside the area indicated by dashed lines to
prevent it from interfering with the feet of the cassette.
12) Install the rear cover of the cassette pedestal and all covers.
13) Install the copier’s rear cover.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-25

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

VII. INSTALLING THE REMOTE DIAGNOSTIC
DEVICE II
A. Unpacking
q

w

e

r

t

y *Not used

u *Not used

Figure 8-701
q
w
e
r

RDD ..........................................1 unit
Power Supply Unit.....................1 unit
Screw (M4×6) ...........................4 pcs.
Harness band...........................2 pcs.

8-26

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

t Switch setting label ..................1 pcs.
y Grounding wire*.........................1 pc.
u Ferrite core ...............................1 pc.
*Not used.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

B. Installation to the Copier
Caution:
This model may not be available for sale in some areas.
Caution:
Keep the following in mind when installing the RDD to the copier:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

This Accessory is to be installed by a qualified personal.
Make sure the copier has been properly installed before starting the work.
Keep the copier’s power cord disconnected during the work.
Be sure to use the appropriate screws (length, diameter).
Make sure the computer in the service station has been properly loaded with the
RDD’s settings data.

1) Remove the two screws w to detach the RDD’s top cover q.
q

w

w

Figure 8-702
2) Connect the Power Supply Unit’s connector e to the RDD’s connector r as shown.
r

e

Figure 8-703

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-27

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

3) Remove the two screws y, and detach the face cover t from the copier’s rear cover.

y

t

y

Fig. 8-704
4) Connect the cable o on the copier side and the RDD’s cable i.
Note:
If a conversion connector is found on the cable !1 from the copier, remove it.

o

Fig. 8-705

8-28

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

o

i

Fig. 8-706
5) Fix the RDD in place on the copier’s rear cover with four screws y; use the screws
removed from the copier.
Modular Jack on the Right
y

y
Fig. 8-707

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-29

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

6) Remove the slack from the cable between the copier and the RDD; keep the excess
cable to the RDD using the harness band !0.

!0

Fig. 8-708

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

7) Shift bit 4 of the DIP switch 2 !1 to ON so that the communication mode between the
RDD and the copier is IPC mode.

!1

LED1 LED2 LED3
2

6

1

1

BAT1

SW3

SW2

LED5
LED6
LED4

1

SW4
2
IC6

CN4

SW1

CN3

CN2

Fig. 8-709
8) If the ROM IC6 !2 is mounted on the RDD’s PCB, shift bit 7 of the DIP switch 2 !3 to
ON; otherwise, shift bit 7 of the DIP switch 2 to OFF.
Note:
1. If the ROM (IC6; !2) is not mounted, you need not mount it.
2. If you are mounting or replacing the ROM (IC6; !2 for upgrading the RDD, be
sure to shift bit 7 of the DIP switch 2 !3 to ON.

8-30

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

!3

LED1 LED2 LED3
2

6

1

1

BAT1
1

SW3

SW2

LED5
LED6
LED4

SW4
2
IC6

CN4

!2

SW1

CN3

CN2

Fig. 8-710

1 2 3 4 5 6

9) Set the bits of the DIP switch 3 !4 on the RDD’s PCB as indicated in the table.

!4

LED1 LED2 LED3
2

6

1

1

BAT1

SW3

SW2

LED5
LED6
LED4

1

SW4
2
IC6

CN4

SW1

CN3

CN2

Fig. 8-711

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-31

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

Switch

Setting

SW3-1

AII

SW3-2

OFF

SW3-3

ON

Description

ON

selects push pulse for RDD circuit confihuration

OFF

selscts dial pulse for RDD circuit confihuration

ON

sets dial pulse speed to 20 PPS

OFF

sets dial pulse speed to 10 PPS

SW3-4

SW3-5

SW3-6

–

reserved

Table 8-701
10) Fit the Power Supply Unit into the power plug, and check that LED 1 !5 (green) on
the RDD’s PCB comes on.
!5
LED1 LED2 LED3
2

6
BAT1

1
SW2

LED5
LED6
LED4

1
SW3

1

SW4
2

IC6

CN4

SW1

CN3

CN2

Fig. 5-712

8-32

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

11) Reset the RDD’s RAM.
Set the bits on the DIP switch 2 !6 on the RDD’s PCB as indicated in the table, and
press the push switch 4 !7 to make sure that LED5 !8 (red) comes on.
bits on SW2

Setting

SW2-1

OFF

SW2-2

OFF

SW2-3

ON

SW2-4

ON

SW2-5

OFF

SW2-6

OFF

SW2-7

See step 9).

SW2-8

OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Table 8-702

!6

!8

LED1 LED2 LED3
2

6

1

1

BAT1

SW3

SW2

LED5
LED6
LED4

SW4

!7

IC6

1

2
CN4

SW1

CN3

CN2

Fig. 8-713

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-33

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

12) After making sure that LED5 !8 (red) has come on, set the bits on the DIP switch 2
!6 on the RDD’s PCB as indicated in the table, and press the push switch 4 !7 to
make sure that LED5 !8 (red) goes out, indicating that the RAM has been reset.
bits on SW2

Setting

SW2-1

OFF

SW2-2

OFF

SW2-3

OFF

SW2-4

ON

SW2-5

OFF

SW2-6

ON

SW2-7

See step 9).

SW2-8

OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Table 8-703

!6

!8

LED1 LED2 LED3
2

6
BAT1

1

1
SW3

SW2

LED5
LED6
LED4

SW4

!7

IC6

1

2
CN4

SW1

CN3

CN2

Fig. 8-714

8-34

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

13) Shift bit 6 of the DIP switch 2 !9 on the RDD’s PCB to OFF.

!9

LED1 LED2 LED3
2

6

1

1

BAT1
1

SW3

SW2

LED5
LED6
LED4

SW4
2
IC6

CN4

SW1

CN3

CN2

Fig. 8-715
14) Connect the RDD to the telephone line.
If you are connecting the RDD on its own, connect the modular jack cable to the
RDD’s connector @0 (LINE).
If you will be using the RDD’s extra circuit, connect the existing telephone or fax
machine to the RDD’s connector @1 (TEL), and connect the telephone circuit to the
RDD’s connector @0 (LINE).

LED1 LED2 LED3
2

6
BAT1

1
SW2

LED5
LED6
LED4

1
SW3

1

SW4
2

IC6

CN4

SW1

CN3

@1

CN2

@0

Fig. 8-716

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-35

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

15) Call up the service station, and request the RDD’s initial settings. (LED 4 @2 (red)
starts to flash upon receipt.)

LED1 LED2 LED3
2

6
BAT1

@2

1
SW2

LED5
LED6
LED4

1

1

SW3
SW4

2
IC6

CN4

SW1

CN3

CN2

Fig. 8-717
16) Call up the service station to check if the initial settings have been successfully
made; if the attempt has failed, reset the RAM once again starting with step 11)
through 13).
Important:
You must confirm that the RDD’s settings are correct by calling the service station.
17) Check that you can place a telephone call from the RDD to the computer in the
service station.
Press the push switch 4 !7. LED6 @3 (red) should come on; it will go out when
transmission ends successfully, or will start to flash if transmission fails.
Retransmission is executed in response to a press on the push switch 4 !7 while
LED6 @3 is flashing.
Transmission is canceled in response to a press on the push switch 1 @4 while LED6
@3 is flashing.

LED1 LED2 LED3
2

6
BAT1

@3

1
SW2

LED5
LED6
LED4

1
SW3

1

SW4

!7

IC6

2
CN4

SW1

@4
CN3

CN2

Fig. 8-718

8-36

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

18) Check that the communications between the RDD and the copier are executed
normally.
Connect the copier’s power plug, and switch it on to make sure that LED 2 @5
(orange) flashes.
@5
LED1 LED2 LED3
2

6
BAT1

1
SW2

LED5
LED6
LED4

1

1

SW3
SW4

2
IC6

CN4

SW1

CN3

CN2

Fig. 8-719
19) Press the copier’ COPY START key to make sure that LED3 @6 (pink) flashes each
time a copy is delivered.
@6
LED1 LED2 LED3
2

6
BAT1

1
SW2

LED5
LED6
LED4

1
SW3

1

SW4
2

IC6

CN4

SW1

CN3

CN2

Fig. 8-720

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

8-37

CHAPTER 8 INSTALLATION

20) Attach the Switch setting label @7, to the RDD’s top cover q; then, record the setting
of each switch on the label.
w
@7
q
w

Fig. 8-721
21) Fix the RDD’s top cover q in place using two screws w. (Make sure that the Power
Unit’s cable is fixed in place on the cable guide inside the RDD and is not trapped by
the top cover q.

8-38

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 9
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
This chapter provides tables of periodically replaced parts and consumables/durables and
scheduled servicing charts.

I.

II.

PERIODICALLY REPLACED
PARTS ................................................9-1
A. Periodically Replaced Parts...........9-1
DURABLES ........................................9-2
A. Copier ............................................9-2

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

III.
IV.
V.

B. Cassette Feeding Module-B2/
Cassette Feeding Module-A2 ........9-3
PERIODICAL SERVICING .................9-4
SERVICING CHART...........................9-5
NOTES ON DRUM KIT ......................9-6

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 9 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

I. PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS
Some parts of the copier must be replaced on a periodical basis to ensure a specific
level of performance; replace them as indicated regardless of the presence of visible
damage.
Plan the replacement to coincide with a scheduled visit.

A. Periodically Replaced Parts
as of JAN. 1997
No.

Parts name

Parts No.

Q’ty

Life (copies)

1

Static eliminator

FG5-2912

1

60,000

Remarks

Note:
The above values are estimates only and subject to change based on the future
data.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

9-1

CHAPTER 9 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

II. DURABLES
The parts shown in the table may require replacement because of deterioration or
damage over the period of warranty; replace them when they fail using the table as a
guide.

A. Copier
as of JAN 1997
No.

Parts name

Parts No.

Q’ty

Life (copies)

Remarks

1

Pick-up roller

FB3-5153-00P

2

100,000

See Note 1.

2

Pick-up separation pad

FG5-2922-020

1

100,000

See Note 1.

3

Multifeeder pick-up roller

FB1-8581-000

1

100,000

See Note 1.

4

Multifeeder separation pad

FB2-2167-000

1

100,000

See Note 1.

5

Fluorescent lamp

FH7-3271-000

1

100,000

6

Fixing cleaning roller

FB3-4494-00P

1

100,000

7

Transfer roller

FB2-2223-000

1

100,000

8

Upper fixing unit

FG5-2928-140

1

200,000

9

Lower fixing roller

FB2-2316-000

1

200,000

10

Lower fixing separation claw

FB1-7275-000

1

200,000

11

Pre-exposure lamp

FG5-2891-000

1

200,000

12

Developing assembly

FG5-3275-04P

1

100,000

12-1

Developing cylinder

FB2-3834-000

1

100,000

12-2

Side seal

FB2-3825-00P

2

100,000

12-4

Developing blade unit

FG5-7012-00P

1

100,000

220/240V

Replace
with item 12
or 12-1
through 12-4

Note:
1.The life represents the number of copies actually made using the part.
2.The above values are estimates only and subject to change based on future data.

9-2

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 9 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

B. Cassette Feeding Module-B2/Cassette Feeding Module-A2
as of JAN 1997
No.

Parts name

Parts No.

Q’ty

Life (copies)

Remarks

1

Pick-up roller

FB2-2251-000

1

100,000

Actual usage

2

Pick-up separation pad

FG5-3614-000

1

100,000

Actual usage

Note:
The above values are estimates only and subject to change based on future data.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

9-3

CHAPTER 9 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

III. PERIODICAL SERVICING
The copier does not have items that require periodical servicing; however, it is
recommended that the following work items be performed during any visit to the user’s.
Step

Work

Checks

1

Meet the person in charge of the
copier.

Check the general
conditions.

2

Make test copies in Direct,
Reduce, Enlarge, and page
separation.

Check the following:
a. image density
b. white background
for soiling
c. characters (clarity)
d. leading edge
(non-image width)
e. left/right margin
f. fixing, registration,back (soiling)
g. abnormal noise
h. counter (operation)

Remarks

standard:
2.5 ±1.5 mm
(Direct, one-sided)
standard:
2.5 ±1.5 mm
(Direct/one-sided)

3

Clean the static eliminator and
feeding assembly.

Use the special brush
(accessory) to clean
the static eliminator.

4

Clean the fixing/delivery assembly.
• paper guide plate
• separation claw

Use solvent.
Use solvent.

5

Perform work according to the number
of copies made (See p. 9-2).

6

Clean the copyboard cover and
copyboard glass.

7

Make test copies.

8

Make sample copies.

9

Arrange the sample copies, and
clean the area around the copier.

10

Record the final counter reading.

11

Fill out the Servicing Sheet, and
report to the person in charge.

9-4

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 9 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

IV. SERVICING CHART
Caution:
Do not use solvents or oils other than those specified.
: replace ✩ : lubricate

: clean
Unit

Parts

External

Copyboard glass

Pick-up
assembly

Pick-up roller

Scanner
drive
assembly

Scanner rail

Feeding
assembly

Transfer guide assembly

every
20,000

: adjust

every
60,000

: inspector clean
Remarks

Use alcohol.

✩

Use alcohol solution; then,
apply lubricant.

Use a moist cloth.

Feeding belt
Feeding assembly
mount
Optical
assembly

Reflecting plate for
original exposure

Use a blower brush; if the
soiling is excessive, use
alcohol.

Side reflecting plate for
original exposure
No. 1 through No. 6
mirrors
Lens
Dust-proofing glass
Drum kit

Clearner base

Charging
assembly

Charging roller

Actual use of the drum kit.

Charging roller cleaner
Static eliminator
Developing
assembly

Developing spacer

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

9-5

CHAPTER 9 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Unit
Fixing
assembly

Parts

every
20,000

every
60,000

Remarks

Lower fixing roller

Use cleaning oil.

Separation claw (lower)

Use solvent.

Fixing inlet guide
Delivery
assembly

Delivery guide/ tray
Delivery spacer

V. NOTES ON DRUM KIT
! Caution:

Do NOT throw the drum kits into fire; it can burst or explode.
Otherwise, dispose of it as nonflammable material.

9-6

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10
TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter provides tables of maintenance/inspection, standards/adjustments, and identification
(image fault/malfunction).

I.

II.

III.

IV.

V.

MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION..10-3
A. Image Adjustment Basic
Procedure ....................................10-3
B. Periodical Servicing.....................10-4
STANDARDS AND
ADJUSTMENTS ...............................10-5
A. Image Adjustment .......................10-5
B. Exposure System ........................10-15
C. Image Formation System ............10-21
D. Pick-Up/Feeding System .............10-25
E. Fixing System..............................10-27
F. Electrical......................................10-35
TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE
FAULTS.............................................10-45
A. Initial Checks ...............................10-45
B. Samples of Image Faults ...........10-48
C. Troubleshooting Image Faults .....10-49
TROUBLESHOOTING
MALFUNCTIONS .............................10-63
A. Troubleshooting Malfunctions ......10-63
TROUBLESHOOTING FEEDING
PROBLEMS......................................10-78
A. Jams (copy paper).......................10-78
B. Feeding Faults.............................10-81

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

VI.

ARRANGEMENT/FUNCTIONS OF
THE ELECTRICAL PARTS...............10-82
A. Sensors .......................................10-82
B. Clutches, Solenoids, and
Switches ......................................10-84
C. Motors, Heaters, and Lamps .......10-86
D. PCBs ...........................................10-88
E. Cassette Feeding Module-A2......10-90
F. Variable Resistors (VR) and check
Pins by PCB ................................10-92
VII. SERVICE MODE ..............................10-94
A. Outline .........................................10-94
B. Using Service Mode ....................10-94
C. Control Display Mode [1] .............10-97
D. I/O Mode [2] ................................10-99
E. Adjustment Mode [3] ...................10-102
F. Operation/Inspection Mode [4] ....10-105
G. Specification Settings Mode [5]...10-107
H. Counter Mode [6] ........................10-108
VIII. SELF DIAGNOSIS............................10-109
A. Copier ..........................................10-109
B. Self Diagnosis (ADF)...................10-113
C. Self Diagnosis (Sorter) ................10-114

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

Guide to Troubleshooting Tables
The troubleshooting procedures in this manual are prepared in the form of tables,
rather than flow charts. Study the following for an idea of how to consult the tables.
EX. AC power is absent.
Checks

Remedies

YES/NO

Cause/Fault

Step

Power plug

1

Is the power plug
connected to the outlet?

NO

Connect the plug.

Covers

2

Are the front door and delivery cover closed properly?

NO

Close the door and cover.

Main power

3

Is the specified voltage
present at the power outlet?

NO

The problem is not the
copier’s; advise the user.

4

Is the specified voltage present between J1-1 and J12? (J1 is located near the
power supply cord mount.)

YES

Go to step 6.

■ To find out the cause (faulty part) of a single problem, see the Cause/Fault column.
In the case of “AC power is absent,” you will learn that the power plug may not be
connected, the covers may not be closed properly, or the main power may be absent.
■ To find out checks to make or remedies to provide for a single problem, see the
Remedy column as guided by YES/NO to the checks; or, move to the next step as
necessary.
Step

Checks

YES/NO

Remedies

1

Is the power
plug connected to
the outlet?

NO

Connect the
plug

NO

Close the door
and cover.

NO

The problem is not
the copier’s: advise
the user.

YES

2

Are the front door
and delivery cover
closed properly?
YES

3

Is the specified
voltage present at the
power outlet?
YES

■ The instruction “Measure the voltage between J109-1 (+) and J109-2 (–) on the DC
controller PCB” asks you to connect the meter’s positive probe (+) to J109-1 and
negative probe to J109-2 (–).

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-1

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAR. 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-2

I MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
A. Image Adjustment Basic Procedure

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-3

B. Periodical Servicing

10-4

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

II. STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
A. Image Adjustment
1. Adjusting the Image Leading Edge Margin ([3], No. 305; registration ON timing)
Activate [3] in service mode, and select ‘No. 305’ (leading edge margin adjustment),
and make adjustments so that the image position is as indicated in Figure 10-201 when
the Test Sheet is copied in Direct.

2.5±1.5mm

Figure 10-201
Making Adjustments
1) Activate [3] in service mode, and select ‘No. 305’ using the keypad.
• The copy count indicator flashes ‘No. 305’.
2) Press the Start key.
3) Change the value using the keypad.
• The value flashes.
• If the value is negative, ‘%’ turns on. To enter a negative value, press the % key,
then enter the value using the keypad.
4) Press the AE key.
• The value flashes as soon as it is entered.
• Press the Start key to start copying operation.
5) To change a value continuously, repeat steps 1) through 4).
6) Press the Clear key to return to selecting items.
The relationship between the setting and the image position is as follows:
• For each ‘1’ in the setting, the position shifts about 0.27 mm.
• ‘+’ shifts the image forward.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-5

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

2. Adjusting the Leading Edge Non-Image Width ([3], No. 306; blank shutter ON
timing)
Activate [3] in service mode, select ‘No. 306’ (leading edge non-image width
adjustment), and make adjustments so that the image leading edge non-image width is
as indicated in Figure 10-202 when the Test Sheet is copied in Direct.
The copier varies the image leading edge non-image width by varying the timing at
which the blank shutter is closed.
You must make this adjustment whenever you have replaced the blank shutter
solenoid or the blank exposure assembly.
Leading Edge Non-Image Width

2.0±1.0mm

Figure 10-202
Reference:
6 mm or less in Reduce/Enlarge mode.
Making Adjustments
1) Activate [3] in service mode, and select ‘No. 306’ using the keypad.
• The copy count indicator flashes ‘No. 306’.
2) Press the Start key.
3) Change the value using the keypad.
• The value flashes.
• If the value is negative, ‘%’ turns on. To enter a negative value, press the % key,
then enter the value using the keypad.
4) Press the AE key.
• The value flashes as soon as it is entered.
• Press the Start key to start copying operation.
5) To change a value continuously, repeat steps 1) through 4).
6) Press the Clear key to return to selecting items.
The relationship between the setting and the image position is as follows:
• For each ‘1’ in the setting, the position shifts about 0.27 mm.
• ‘+’ increases the non-image width.

10-6

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

3. Adjusting the Image Trailing Edge Non-Image Width ([3], No. 309; blank shutter
timing)
Trailing Edge Non-Image Width

2.5±
1.5mm

Figure 10-203
Activate [3] in service mode, and select ‘No. 309’ (leading edge non-image width
adjustment); make adjustments so that the image trailing edge non-image width is as
indicated in Figure 10-203 when the Test Sheet is copied in Direct.
The copier varies the image trailing edge non-image width by varying the timing at
which the blank shutter is opened.
Making Adjustments
1) Activate [3] in service mode, and select ‘No. 309’ using the keypad.
• The copy count indicator flashes ‘No. 309’.
2) Press the Start key.
3) Change the value using the keypad.
• The value flashes.
• If the value is negative, ‘%’ turns on. To enter a negative value, press the % key,
then enter the value using the keypad.
4) Press the AE key.
• The value flashes as soon as it is entered.
• Press the Start key to start copying operation.
5) To change a value continuously, repeat steps 1) through 2).
6) Press the Clear key to return to selecting items.
The relationship between the setting and the image position is as follows:
• For each ‘1’ in the setting, the position shifts about 0.27 mm.
• ‘+’ decreases the trailing edge non-image width.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-7

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

4. Adjusting the Left/Right Registration
Make adjustments so that the position of the image is as indicated in Figure 10-205
when the Test Sheet is copied in Direct.
a.

Pick-Up from the Cassette
Turn the screw 1 shown in Figure 10-204 to adjust the position of the cassette hook
plate.
standard: 0.±1.5 mm
clockwise turn: paper moves in the direction of – shown in Figure 10-205.
counterclockwise turn: paper moves in the direction of + in Figure 10-205.
q

Figure 10-204
(+)

(-)

0±1.5mm

0
2
4
6
8
10

Figure 10-205
b.

Pick-Up from the Multifeeder
Loosen the screw 1, and move the position of the tray so that it is 0 ±1.5 mm.
q

Figure 10-206

10-8

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

5. Adjusting the Left/Right Margin (No. 311; left/right margin)
Select ‘No. 311’ (left/right margin adjustment); make adjustments so that the left/right
margin is 2.5 ±1.5 mm when the Test Sheet is copied in Direct.
You must adjust the left/right registration before making this adjustment.
Making Adjustments
a. Margin (adjusting the width)
1) Activate [3] in service mode, and select ‘No. 311’ using the keypad.
2) Press the Start key.
3) Enter a value using the keypad.
• If the value is negative, ‘%’ turns on. To enter a negative value, press the % key,
then enter the value using the keypad.
The relationship between the setting and the image position is as follows:
• For each ‘1’ in the setting, the margin (one side) shifts about 0.37 mm.
• range: 0 to 15 mm
• ‘+’ increases the margin.
• ‘–’ decreases the margin.

Shutter
Adjust the distance between the
two shutters in the blanking
assembly.

Figure 10-207
b.

Left/Right Margin
Turn the blank shutter adjustment screw located on the front side plate shown in
Figure 10-208 so that the value is as specified.
clockwise turn:moves the margin toward the front.
counterclockwise turn:moves the margin toward the rear.
a full turn: shifts the margin by about 1 mm.
q

Figure 10-208

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-9

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

The entire shutters are
shifted.

Shutter

Figure 10-209
Caution:
After the adjustments (both a and b), turn on and off the power switch or change
the reproduction ratio so that the blank exposure assembly performs home
positioning.

6. Adjusting the Scanning Lamp Intensity
Turn VR301 on the DC controller as follows whenever you have replaced the
scanning lamp, intensity sensor, or DC controller.
1) Set Test Sheet NA3 on the copyboard, and close the copyboard cover.
2) Adjust the copy density (AE off) to electrical central position (service mode 1/0 mode
[2] No. 212 Value = 153~159).
❋ Without this adjustment, exposure value becomes invalid.
3) Turn VR301 on the DC controller so that the image is optimum.
• If the image is too light, turn the VR slightly clockwise.
• If the image is too dark, turn the VR slightly counterclockwise.
Reference:
1. The term optimum image refers to a copy whose gray scale No. 8 corresponds to
gray scale No. 4 through 7 of the Test Sheet without fogging.
2. An excessive turn on the VR could put out the lamp. If that is the case, turn it
clockwise until it stops, and turn off and then on the power for re-adjustment.

Caution:
Be sure to execute AE adjustment after these adjustments.

10-10

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

7. AE Adjustment
Adjust the AE mechanism using the following three service modes:
q AE Basic Adjustment
No. 410 .............scanner forward stop
No. 408 ........scanning lamp on check
No. 208 .....AE sensor voltage display
No. 301lamp intensity automatic adjustment at time of AE scan
w Copy Density in AE Mode (No. 302)
(developing bias) reference adjustment
e Copy Density in AE Mode
(developing bias) slope adjustment
If the copy density is not optimum after executing AE basic adjustment q (No. 410,
No. 408, No. 208, No. 301), execute w and then , if necessary, e, i.e., No. 302 and No.
303.
If you have replaced the AE sensor, scanning lamp, or DC controller, adjust the
scanning lamp intensity (VR 301); then, execute AE basic adjustment q, scanner
forward stop (No. 410), scanning lamp on check (No. 408), AE sensor voltage display
(No. 208), and lamp intensity automatic adjustment (No. 301).
Go through the following when making adjustments; Table 10-1 is a list of service
modes excluding scanner forward stop (No. 410), list of service modes excluding
scanner forward stop (No. 410), scanning lamp on check (No. 408), and AE sensor
voltage display (No. 208).
a.

AE Basic Adjustment (No. 410, No. 408, No. 208, No. 301)
In this adjustment, the intensity of the scanning lamp is read by the lamp intensity
sensor and the voltage of the AE sensor unit is adjusted by VR 391 on the DC controller.
After the adjustment, execute the lamp intensity automatic adjustment for AE scans.
1) Place the Test Sheet NA-3 on the copyboard, and close the copyboard.
Adjust to the appropriate copy density in non-AE mode (settings) by suing bias
adjustment knob “VR302”. Then press the service mode switch (SW302) to activate
service mode.
2) Enter ‘4’ using the keypad, and press the AE key.
• The display indicates ‘401’.
3) Enter ‘410’ using the keypad.
• The display indicates ‘410’.
4) Press the Start key once.
• The scanner moves forward.
Caution:
Each press moves the scanner forward; do not press more than once.

5) Enter ‘408’ using the keypad, and press the Start key.
• The display indicates ‘ON’, and turns off after about 1.5 sec.
6) Press the Clear key twice.
• The display indicates ‘4’.
7) Press ‘2’ on the keypad, and press the AE key.
• The display indicates ‘201’.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-11

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

8) Enter ‘208’ using the keypad, and press the start button.
• The display indicates ‘208’.
9) Press the Start key.
• The display indicates ‘0–255’.
10) Turn VR391 on the DC controller so that the reading on the display is ‘100~105’.
VR391

Figure 10-210 DC Controller PCB
11) Turn off and on the power switch.
• This turns off and on the scanning lamp.
12) Press the service mode switch.
• The copier enters service mode, and the display indicates ‘1’.
13) Enter ‘3’ using the keypad, and press the AE key.
• The display indicates ‘301’.
14) Press the Start key.
Caution:
Wait until initial rotation is over.

• After initial rotation is over, the AE indicators starts to flash.
15) Press the AE key; the following take place to indicate that the optimum intensity is
adjusted automatically:
• The AE indicator stops flashing and remains on.
• The scanner moves to the AE measurement position.
• When the intensity has stabilized, the reading taken by the AE sensor is stored in
memory.
• The lamp is turned off, and the scanner is returned to its original position.
16) When the above has ended, press the clear key twice.
• The display indicated ‘3’.
17) Enter ‘1’ using the keypad, and press the AE key.
• The display indicates ‘101’.
18) Enter ‘116’ using the keypad, and press the Start key.
• Make sure that the display indicates ‘68–72’; otherwise, start with step 2) of
operation/inspection mode for re-adjustment.

10-12

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

b.
1)
2)
3)
4)

5)
6)

Copy Density (development bias) Reference Point Adjustment for AE Mode (No.
302)
If the indication is not in the 300’s, activate adjustment mode (service mode) as in the
case of ‘No. 301’.
Press [2] on the keypad.
• The copier indicates ‘302’.
Press the Start key.
• The copier indicates the current setting.
Change the setting using the keypad, and press the AE key.
• A higher setting causes the AE copies to be darker.
• default:
0
range:
–26 to +26
• If the setting is negative, the ‘%’ is indicated. To enter a negative value, press the
‘%’ key, and enter a setting.
• When the copier has read the setting, the indication stops flashing and remains
on.
Record the new setting on the service mode label.
To end, press the Clear key.
• The copier returns to selection mode, and indicates ‘302’.
• As necessary, execute ‘No. 303’.

c. Copy Density (development bias) Slope Adjustment for AE Mode (No. 303)
1) If the indication is not in the 300’s, activate adjustment mode (service mode) as in the
case of No. 301.
2) Press [3] on the keypad.
• The copier indicates ‘303’.
3) Press the Start key.
• The copier indicates the current setting.
4) Change the setting with the keypad, and press the AE key.
• A larger setting causes the AE copies to be darker.
• default:.........................................0
range: ...........................–26 to +26
• If the setting is negative, ‘%’ is indicated. To enter a negative value, press the ‘%’
key, and enter a setting.
• When the copier has read the setting, the indication stops flashing and remains
on.
5) Record the new settings on the service mode label.
6) Press the Reset key.
• The copier de-activates service mode.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-13

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Item
No. 301

Function
Automatic lamp
intensity adjustment
for AE scans

Remarks\

Description

The lamp intensity
is automatically
adjusted so that the
copies of the Test
Chart will be made
at density 5.

Lighter 9
Copy
density 5
Darker
Test Chart

No. 302

Density of
original

q A lower setting in
service mode causes
the AE copies to be
darker.
w A higher settings
in service mode
causes the AE copies
to be lighter.

Copy density
(development bias)
reference point
adjustment for AE
mode
w

q

Lighter 9

default: 0
range: –26 to +26

Copy
density 5
Darker
Test Chart

No. 303

Copy density
(development bias)
slope adjustment for
AE mode

Density of
original

q
Lighter 9

w
Copy
density 5
Darker
Test Chart

News- Density of
paper original

After adjustment with
the test sheet NA-3,
using AE mode,
density adjustment
should show ‘5’.
In non-AE mode,
density ‘5’ must also
be apprppriate
(adjusted with knob
VR302).
q A higher setting
in service mode
causes copies of a
newspaper to be
lighter.
w A lower setting
in service mode
causes copies of a
newspaper to be
darker.
default: 0
range: –26 to +26

Table 10-201

10-14

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

B. Exposure System
1. Routing the Scanner Drive Cable
Route the cable as shown by q through !0; then, adjust the cable tension and mirror
position as described.
!0

Set screws

Loosen the set
screws to enable
free rotation.

w
e

Screw

Loosen the
screw,and shift
it down.

Put the steel ball
into the hole in
the pulley; wind
the cable nine
times toward the
inside, and four
times toward the
outside; then, snap
on the pulley clip.

Attach the mirror
positioning tool.

i
Re-tighten
the screw.

Pulley clip

Steel ball

q

t
o
y
r

!1

u

34±1mm

Figure 10-211
Caution:
When attaching the wire spring, pay attention to the orientation of the spring; see
the diagrams below. If not attached correctly, its hook tip could interfere with the
cable.
Hook

Wire spring

Hook
Wire spring

Cable

Cable

Figure 10-212

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-15

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

2. Adjusting the Mirror Position (optical distance between No. 1 mirror and No.
2/No. 3 mirror)
1) Keep the mirror positioning tool handy.
(See “4 Assembling the Mirror Positioning Tool on P. 10-17.”)
2) Move the No. 1 mirror mount forward, and match the long hole in the front side plate
and the cable fixing screw q.
q

(front)

(rear)

Figure 10-213
3) Loosen the set screw on the pulley.
4) Set the mirror positioning tool w to the No. 1 mirror mount and the No. 2 mirror mount
(both front and rear).
Mirror positioning tool (front)

Mirror positioning tool (rear)

w

(front)
(front)

Figure 10-214
5) Attach the scanner cable fixing to the No. 1 mirror mount using two screws e (both
front and rear).
e

(front)

(rear)

Figure 10-215

10-16

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

6) Tighten the screw on the pulley.
7) Detach the positioning tool (FY9-3009).
3. Adjusting the Scanner Cable Tension
Move the tension plate and tighten the screw w so that the distance across the ends
of the cable spring q is 34 ±1 mm as indicated in Figure 10-216.
q

w

34±1mm

Figure 10-216
4. Assembling the Mirror Positioning Tool
1) Remove the screw found in position B.

B

B

A

A

Position B
Longest pin

Medium-Length pin

Figure 10-217
2) Fit the screw removed in step 1) in position A, and tighten it slightly.
3) Extend the arm accommodated by the main frame unit it butts against the stopper as
in Figure 10-218.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-17

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

4) Tighten the screw.
B

B

A

A

Position A

Figure 10-218
5. Points to Note When Attaching the Fluorescent Lamp Heater/Scanning Lamp
• Attach the heater to the lamp as follows:
Lightemitting
portion

60m

m

1~

5m

m

Fluorescent
heater

60m

m

Figure 10-219
Caution:
Do not touch the fluorescent lamp. (Use lint-free paper.)
Do not block the light-emitting portion by the fluorescent lamp heater.

10-18

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Attach the scanning lamp so that its light-emitting portion (open side) is to the left
when viewed from the front of the copier as shown in Figure 10-220.
Light-emitting portion

Figure 10-220 (front view)
Caution:
Do not touch the fluorescent lamp. (Use rint-free paper)
Be sure to adjust the gain and AE whenever you have replaced the fluorescent
lamp. (See P. 10-11.)

•

Make sure that the cut-off of the fluorescent heater is correctly oriented in relation
to the intensity adjustment sensor.
Fluorescent lamp heater

Light adjustment sensor

Figure 10-221
Reference:
The fluorescent lamp heater will not operate unless the copier’s heater switch is
turned on.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-19

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

6. Positioning the Change Solenoid
Make adjustments by loosening the two screws t so that the gear r butts against
the direction of b by the arm e when the steel core q of the solenoid is fully pushed in
the direction of B, i.e., when the E-ring comes into contact with the solenoid.
e
a

q

t

A

B

b

r

w
Figure 10-222

10-20

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

C. Image Formation System
1. Positioning the Blank Shutter Solenoid
Adjust the position of the blank shutter solenoid so that the bottom A is 9.5 ±0.5 mm
on both sides when the solenoid is moved in the direction of ON; try not to force down
the shutter.
After adjustments, make sure that the solenoid moves smoothly.

A

Figure 10-223a

Figure 10-223b

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-21

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

2. Routing the Blank Shutter Cable
Attach the spring to
the outside of the
sides shutter.
Slide shutter (rear)

Wind 3.5 times.
Slide shutter

(front)

Figure 10-224
3. Positioning the Solenoid for the Primary Charging Roller
Loosen the two screws used to fix the solenoid e in place, and move the solenoid in
the direction of B so that theR in Figure 10-225 is 5.5 ±0.2 mm when the joint q is
butted against a of the solenoid support plate w.
Caution:
Be sure to make the adjustment whenever you have replaced the solenoid.

1

2

3

a
= 5.5 ± 0.2

Figure 10-225
10-22

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

4. After Replacing the Drum Unit
Whenever you have replaced the drum unit, enter the date of replacement and the
current counter reading on the label (Figure 10-226) that came with the drum unit; attach
the label to the front cover of the new drum unit, and perform the image basic adjustment
procedure.

Figure 10-226
5.
1)
2)
3)

Attaching the Drum Heater
Detach the front cover.
Open the copier’s top body by operating the copier open/close lever.
Remove the two fixing screws w, and detach the harness cover q.

Figure 10-227
4) Detach the transfer roller and the static eliminator.
5) Detach the transfer guide.
6) Butt the two heaters against the transfer guide as shown in Figure 10-228, and fix the
two mounts with two screws e; further, fix the harness in place using two harness
bands r (front, rear).

Figure 10-228

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-23

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

7) Fix the harness in place using two SK binders (WT2-5145; front, rear) t; then, insert
it into the transfer guide.
Caution:
When fixing the harness in place, make sure that the cap portions of the terminals
alternate; keeping them in parallel will bring them in contact with the transfer roller.
8) Fix the harness with two SK binder t (front, rear) in place, and insert it into the
transfer guide.

Figure 10-229
9) Connect the connector y as shown in Figure 10-230.

Figure 10-230
Caution:
When attaching the transfer guide to the copier after attaching the drum heater,
make sure that the spring at the rear is firmly in the groove.

10-24

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

D. Pick-Up/Feeding System
1. Orientation of the Pick-Up Roller
Attach the pick-up roll q so that the side w shown in Figure 10-231 is toward the
rear.

w

q

Figure 10-231
2. Orientation of the Multifeeder Pick-Up Roller
Attach the multifeeder pick-up roller q so that the side with the collar with a cross w
is toward the rear.
w
q

(front)

Figure 10-232

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-25

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

3. Positioning the Paper Guide Plate Cam (multifeeder)
Temporarily fix the screw with a hex nut of the spring clutch assembly in place; turn
the control ring. Make adjustments so that the hole in the cam and the hole in the
multifeeder drive unit match as indicated in Figure 10-233 when the claw of the control
ring is engaged with the solenoid; then, fix in place.

Figure 10-233

10-26

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

E. Fixing System
1. Points to Note When Attaching the Fixing Film
Orient it so that the cut-off is toward the rear.
Make sure that the end toward the front is along the middle groove.

Film end aligned.

Figure 10-234
2. Points to Note When Attaching the Heater Connector
• When attaching the heater connector to the fixing heater, take care not to damage
the heater.
• When tightening the screw, hold the connector making sure that both its top and
bottom are free of pressure; do not tighten the screw excessively.

Screw

Heater connector

Figure 10-235

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-27

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

3. Adjusting the Fixing Film Drive Roller Pressure
If a fixing fault occurs, be sure to go through the following to adjust the pressure of
the drive roller.
1) Detach the fixing cover.
2) Detach the inside cover of the copier’s front side.
3) Close the copier’s upper body, and insert the door switch actuator.
4) Press the service mode switch (SW302).
• The copier enters service mode, and the display indicates ‘1’.
5) Press ‘4’ on the keypad.
• The display indicates ‘4’.
6) Press the AE key.
• The copier enters operation check mode, and the display indicates ‘401’.
7) Press ‘5’ on the keypad.
• The display indicates ‘405’.
8) Press the Start key.
• The copier enters fixing film initial rotation mode (405) to return the fixing film to
its proper position.
• The fixing film stops automatically as soon as it reaches its proper position.
• The copier indicates the position of the film in the copy density indicator.
9) Open the copier’s top body.
10) Check that the arrow q is at the middle of the memory as shown in Figure 10-236.
q

Figure 10-236 (rear view)
11) Close the copier’s top body, and activate service mode.
12) Press ‘4’ on keypad; when the display indicates ‘4’, press the AE key.
13) Press ‘4’ on the keypad; when the display indicates ‘404’, press the Start key.
• The copier enters fixing tension roller mode (404).
• The fixing tension roller becomes fixed, and the fixing film rotates idly.
• The count indicator indicates how long the fixing film sensor has remained on.
Caution:
If the copy count indicator keeps indicating ‘0’ or ‘528’ during adjustment,
immediately press the Stop key to de-activate service mode.

10-28

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

If the copy countis ‘180’ or higher and ‘348’ or lower and has not changed, go to step
17). Or, if 10’s and 100’s do not change, go to step 17);
14) Loosen the fixing screw w slightly; i.e., move it to the left about 1 mm.
15) Turn the adjusting screw e so that the copy count is ‘180’ or higher’ and ‘348’ or
lower.
Caution:
Adjust so that 10’s and 100’s will not change; ignore 1’s may change ±5.)

•
•

A clockwise turn decreases the reading.
A counterclockwise turn increases the reading.

w

e

Figure 10-237
16) When the reading in the copy counter is appropriately correct, tighten the screw w;
make sure that the reading is appropriate after tightening the screw.
17) Press the Start key.
• The copier enters check mode (404), and the fixing film rotates idly for about 2.5
min; check that the fixing film has not shifted from the adjusted position.
• The copy count indicator indicates “ ” or “ ”; if “ ” is indicated, repeat steps
starting with 13).
If “
” is indicated, repeat steps 4) through 10).
18) Attach the cover.
4. Points to Note after Replacing the Fixing Upper Unit
You must enter the resistance of the heater by selecting ‘No. 304’ in service mode
whenever you have replaced the fixing upper unit. (See p. 10-31.)

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-29

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

5. Adjusting the Nip
The nip should be as indicated in Figure 10-238. You must make the following
adjustments if fixing faults occur.
c

A4
paper
Feeding
direction

b

Center of copy
paper

a
b : 4 -1mm
+2mm
a-c : 1mm or less

Figure 10-238
Note:
a and c represent points 10 cm from both edges of the copy.

a.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)

Measuring the Nip
Measure the nip before starting the day’s work; for example, first thing in the morning.
Open the copyboard cover, and make a solid black copy in A4.
Place the copy in the multifeeder with the solid black face up.
Press the service mode switch (SW302) using a hex key.
• The copier enters service mode, and indicates ‘1’.
Press [4] on the keypad.
• The copier indicates ‘4’.
Press the AE key.
• The copier enters operation/inspection mode, and indicates ‘401’.
Press [6] on the keypad.
• The copier indicates ‘406’.
Press the Start key.
• The multifeeder picks up paper, and the copier positions the paper as in Figure
10-238 for measurement, and dischages it.

Reference:
The fixing rollers hold the paper and stop it when half of it has been delivered; the
paper is discharged automatically about 10 sec later.

8) Measure the nip.

10-30

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

6. Routing the Drive Belt
Route the drive belt around the pulley and tensioner as shown in Figure 10-239.

Figure 10-239
7. Storing the Fixing Heater Resistance
You must store the resistance of the fixing heater as follows whenever you are
replacing the fixing upper unit; do not change the setting unless you have replaced the
heater.
1) Take notes of the resistance (ohm) of the fixing heater recorded on the rear side plate
of the fixing upper unit.
2) Attach the fixing upper unit to the copier.
3) Open the front door, and insert the door switch actuator into the door switch.
4) Press the service mode switch (SW302) with a hex key.
• The copier activates service mode, and indicates ‘1’.
5) Press [3] on the keypad.
• The copier activates adjustment mode, and indicates ‘3’.
6) Press the AE key.
• The copier enters adjustment mode, and indicates ‘301’.
7) Press [0] and [4] on the keypad.
• The copier indicates ‘304’.
8) Press the Start key.
• The copier indicates the current setting.
9) Enter the measured reading, and press the AE key to store.
10) Record the new setting on the service mode label.
11) Press the Reset key.
• The copier de-activates service mode.
unit:

ohms; enter a value which is the result of the measured resistance multiplied
by 10.
range (default)
220/240V: ..........235 to 325 (280)

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-31

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Reference:
1. If the measured resistance is 9.5 ohms, enter ‘095’; if 28 ohms, enter ‘280’.
2. The power supplied to the fixing heater is phase-controlled based on the voltage of
the power supply and the resistance being stored.
8. Setting the Fixing Heater Temperature Control Value
You can change the fixing temperature control value in the field in any of the following
two ways:
8-1 When Replacing the Fixing Upper Unit
Set the initial control temperature value for the 1st to 4th copies under No. 508 of
service mode for when the temperature of the fixing heater is less than 120°C at time
copying is started.
1) Take notes of the value recorded on the label on the fixing upper unit heater stay
(rear).
Label
3-digit resistance to be entered in
service mode No. 304
1

2

3

Fixing temperature control value
to be entered in service mode No.508
Label location

Figure 10-240 Heater Stay Side Plate (rear)

10-32

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

2) Replace the fixing upper unit.
3) Press the service switch (SW302).
• The copier enters service mode and indicates ‘1’.
4) Enter ‘5’ using the keypad.
• The display indicates ‘5’.
5) Press the AE key, and enter ‘8’ on the keypad.
• The display indicates ‘508’.
6) Press the Start key.
• The display indicates ‘001’, ‘002’, or ‘003’.
7) Enter the control value you have recorded in step 1) using the keypad.
Example:
If the value recorded on the heater stay (rear) of the fixing upper unit is ‘2’,
a.Enter ‘2’ using the keypad to change the value.
b.Press the AE key.
c. Press the Reset key.

Caution:
You must set the resistance of the heater also when replacing the fixing upper unit.

8-2 When Replacing the Fixing Film
1) Replace the fixing film.
2) Replace the copy paper in the cassette with A3 size copy paper.
3) Press the service switch (SW302).
• The copier enters service mode and indicates ‘1’.
4) Enter ‘5’ using the keypad, and press the AE key.
• The display indicates ‘501’.
5) Enter ‘5’ using the keypad, and press the Start key.
• The display indicates ‘001’, ‘002’, or ‘003’.
6) Enter ‘2’ using the keypad, and press the Clear key.
8) Make 20 copies or more in A3 to warm up the entire fixing upper unit.
9) Place the Test Chart NA-3 on the copyboard, and put a blank sheet of paper (A3) to
cover about 2/3 of the Test Chart (bottom).

Test Chart

Blank
sheet of
paper
(A3)

Figure 10-241

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-33

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

10) Enter ‘4’ using the keypad, and set the copy count.
11) Press the service switch (SW302), thereby recalling the temperature of the No. 1
thermistor.
• The display indicates ‘1’.
12) Press the AE key, and enter ‘9’ on the keypad.
• The display indicates ‘109’.
13) Press the Start key.
• Make 4 copies in A3.
14) When copying is finished, take note of the temperature reading in the display. Press
the Start key once again when the reading is 116°–118°C.
• Make four copies in A3.
15) Check if offset has occurred.
• If offset is noted, change the temperature control value of the fixing heater. Go to
step 16).
• If offset is not noted, go to step 21).
16) Press the Clear key, and enter ‘5’ using the keypad.
• The display indicates ‘508’.
17) Press the AE key, and enter ‘8’ using the keypad.
• The display indicates ‘508’.
18) Press the Start key.
• The display indicates ‘002’.
19) Enter ‘3’ using the keypad.
• The display indicates ‘003’.
20) Press the AE key.
• The setting is changed.
21) Press the Reset key.
• The copier leaves service mode.

10-34

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

F. Electrical
1. After Replacing the PCB
You must make the adjustments that follow whenever you have replaced the following
PCBs.
a. DC Controller PCB
1) Enter the value recorded on the service mode label attached behind the front door in
service mode (‘3’; see p. 10-102).
2) Adjust the multifeeder paper width sensor; see p. 10-43.
3) Adjust the intensity of the scanning lamp; see p. 10-10.
4) Adjust AE; see p. 10-11.
As necessary, change the settings in service mode and user mode.
Caution:
Be sure to record all new settings that you have entered.

b. Composite Power Supply PCB
1) Enter the values recorded on the label attached to the composite power supply in
service mode (‘No. 315’ through ‘No. 318’; ‘3’ of adjustment mode); see p. 10-103.
Be sure to record any new settings on the service mode label.
c. AE Sensor PCB
1) Adjust AE; see p. 10-11.
Caution:
Be sure to record all new settings that you have entered.

d. Intensity Sensor PCB
1) Adjust the intensity of the scanner lamp; see p. 10-10.
2) Adjust AE; see p. 10-11.
Caution:
Be sure to record all new settings that you have entered.
2. Clearing the Back-Up RAM
1) Open the front door, and insert the door switch activator into the door switch.
2) Press the service mode switch (SW302) with a hex key.
• The copier activates service mode, and indicates ‘1’.
3) Press [4] on the keypad.
• The copier indicates ‘4’.
4) Press the AE key.
• The copier activates operation/inspection mode, and indicates ‘401’.
5) Press [5] and [0] on the keypad.
• The copier indicates ‘450’.
6) Press the Start key.
• The copier indicates ‘noP’.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-35

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

7) Press the AE key.
• The indication changes to ‘EE’.
8) Press the Start key.
• The indication returns to ‘450’.
9) Turn off and on the power switch.
• The copier clears the backup RAM, and returns the default settings.
Reference:
To cancel RAM clearing, press the Clear key and then the Reset key. To cancel it
after having finished step 8), press the Start key once again; when ‘noP’ is
indicated, press the Start key once again.

3. Checking the Photointerrupters
The copier allows checking the photointerrupters with a conventional meter or in
service mode.
a. Using a Meter
1) Set the meter to the 12VDC range.
2) Connect the (–) probe of the meter to J301-4 (GND) on the DC controller.
3) Make checks as indicated.
1: 5V
0: 0V
Reference:
All photointerrupters except PS1, PS2, PS3, PS6, and PS9 are connected in the
form of a matrix, and for this reason may show variations if checked by a meter; use
service mode for these photointerrupters.

b.
1)
2)
3)
•
4)
•
5)
•

Using Service Mode
Open the front door, and insert a door switch actuator into the door switch.
Press the service mode switch (SW302) with a hex key.
Press [2] on the keypad.
The copier indicates ‘2’.
Press the AE key.
The copier activates I/O display mode, and indicates ‘201’.
Enter a number with the keypad, and press the Start key.
The copier checks each photointerrupter; see the copy count indicator.
2-a
2-f

1-a
1-f
1-b

2-b
2-g

1-g
1-e

2-e
2-c
2-d

1-c
1-d

Figure 10-242
10-36

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

a.

Copier
+ probe

Name

Checks

Service mode
PS1

J311-2

Scanner home
position sensor
(SCHP)

—

PS2

J307-2

Lens home
reposition
sensor (LHP)

No. 205 1-c

PS3

J315-2

Blank shutter
home position
sensor (BSHP)

No. 205 1-d

PS4

J313-9

Cassette paper
sensor (CPD*)

No. 205 1-c

PS5

J313-3

Multifeeder
paper sensor
(MFPD*)

No. 204 1-d

PS6

J314-2

Registration
sensor (RPD)

No. 205 1-a

PS7

J314-6

Separation
sensor (SPD*)

No. 204 1-b

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

Display
indication

Voltage
reading
on meter

Move the
scanner by
hand while
in standby.

The scanner is at
home position.

1

5V

The scanner is not
at home reposition.

0

0V

Move the
lens mount
by hand while
in standby.

The light-blocking
plate is present.

1

5V

The light-blocking
plate is not present.

0

0V

Detach the
blank exposure assembly; do not
disconnect
J315. Move
the blank
shutter.

The light-blocking
plate is present.

1

5V

The light-blocking
plate is not present.

0

0V

Slide out
the cassette
while in
standby.

The cassette is slid
out.

0

—

The cassette with
paper is slid in.

1

—

Place paper
on the
multifeeder
tray while in
standby.

Paper is placed.

0

—

Paper is not placed.

1

—

Open the
right door
while in
standby, and
insert paper
along the
paper guide
plate.

Paper is inserted.

1

5V

Paper is not
inserted.

0

0V

Move the
detection
lever with a
finger while
in standby.

The lever is moved.

0

—

The lever is not
moved.

1

—

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-37

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Name

+ probe

Checks

Service mode
PS8

J312-2

Delivery sensor
(DSPD*)

No. 204 1-g

PS9

J304-12

Fixing film
sensor (FFD)

No. 205 1-e

PS10

J306-15

Right door
open/closed
sensor (RDOP*)

No. 204 1-a

Q651

J314-8

Cassette size
sensor 1 (CSZ-1)

No. 203 1-e

Q652

J314-9

Cassette size
sensor 2 (CSZ-2)

No. 203 1-f

Q653

J314-10

Cassette size
sensor 3 (CSZ-3)

No. 203 1-g

10-38

Display
indication

Voltage
reading
on meter

Move the
detection
lever with a
finger while
in standby.

The lever is moved.

0

—

The lever is not
moved.

1

—

Move the
detection
lever with a
finger while
in standby

The light-blocking
plate is present.

1

5V

The light-blocking
plate is not present.

0

0V

Open the
right door
while in
standby

The right door is
open.

0

—

The right door is
closed.

1

—

Slide out the
cassette
while in
standby, and
move the
detection
lever with a
finger.

The lever is moved.

0

—

The lever is not
moved.

1

—

Slide out the
cassette
while in
standby, and
move the
detection
lever with a
finger

The lever is moved.

0

—

The lever is not
moved.

1

—

Slide out the
cassette
while in
standby, and
move the
detection
lever with a
finger.

The lever is moved.

0

—

The lever is not
moved.

1

—

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

+ probe

Name

Display
indication

Voltage
reading
on meter

The lever is moved.

0

—

The lever is not
moved.

1

—

Display
indication

Voltage
reading
on meter

Checks

Service mode
Q654

J314-11

Cassette size
sensor 4 (CSZ-4)

No. 203 2-a

b.

Slide out the
cassette
while in
standby, and
move the
detection
lever with a
finger.

Cassette Feeding Unit
+ probe

Name

Checks

Service mode
PS1cu

J319-A2

Cassette 2
vertical path
sensor (C2VPD)

No. 204 2-b

PS2cu

J319-A4

Cassette 2
paper sensor
(C2PD*)

No. 204 1-e

Q651-2

J319-B1

Cassette 2 size
sensor 1 (C2SZ1)

No. 201 1-e

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

Draw out the
cassette 2
while in
standby, and
put copy
paper over
the pick-up
guide plate.

Copy paper is
inserted.

1

—

Copy paper is not
inserted.

0

—

Draw out
the cassette
2 while in
standby.

The cassette is
drawn out.

0

—

The cassette is put
back with paper in
it.

1

—

Draw out the
cassette
while in
standby, and
move the
detecting
lever by a finger; be sure
to set paper
selection to
cassette 2.

The lever is moved.

0

—

The lever is not
moved.

1

—

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-39

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Name

+ probe

Checks

Service mode
Q652-2

J319-B2

Cassette 2 size
sensor 2 (C2SZ2)

No. 201 1-f

Q653-2

J319-B3

Cassette 2 size
sensor 3 (C2SZ3)

No. 201 1-g

Q654-2

J319-B4

Cassette 2 size
sensor 4 (C2SZ4)

No. 201 2-a

PS3cu

J319-A7

Cassette 3
vertical path
sensor (C3VPD)

No. 203 1-b

10-40

Display
indication

Voltage
reading
on meter

Draw out the
cassette
while in
standby, and
move the
detecting
lever by a finger; be sure
to set paper
selection to
cassette 2.

The lever is moved.

0

—

The lever is not
moved.

1

—

Draw out the
cassette
while in
standby, and
move the
detecting
lever by a finger; be sure
to set paper
selection to
cassette 2.

The lever is moved.

0

—

The lever is not
moved.

1

—

Draw out the
cassette
while in
standby, and
move the
detecting
lever by a finger; be sure
to set paper
selection to
cassette 2.

The lever is moved.

0

—

The lever is not
moved.

1

—

Draw out the
cassette 3
while in
standby, and
put copy
paper over
the pick-up
guide plate.

Copy paper is
placed.

1

—

Copy paper is not
placed.

0

—

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

+ probe

Name

Checks

Service mode
PS4cu

J319-A9

Cassette 3
paper sensor
(C3PD*)

No. 203 1-f

Q651-3

J319-B1

Cassette 3 size
sensor 1 (C3SZ1)

No. 202 1-e

Q652-3

J319-B2

Cassette 3 size
sensor 2 (C3SZ2)

No. 202 1-f

Q653-3

J319-B3

Cassette 3 size
sensor 3 (C3SZ3)

No. 202 1-g

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

Display
indication

Voltage
reading
on meter

Draw out
the cassette
3 while in
standby.

The cassette is
drawn out.

0

—

The cassette is
inserted with paper
in it.

1

—

Draw out the
cassette
while in
standby, and
move the
detecting
lever by a finger; be sure
to set paper
selection to
cassette 3.

The lever is moved.

0

—

The lever is not
moved.

1

—

Draw out the
cassette
while in
standby, and
move the
detecting
lever by a finger; be sure
to set paper
selection to
cassette 3.

The lever is moved.

0

—

The lever is not
moved.

1

—

Draw out the
cassette
while in
standby, and
move the
detecting
lever by a finger; be sure
to set paper
selection to
cassette 3.

The lever is moved.

0

—

The lever is not
moved.

1

—

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-41

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Name

+ probe

Checks

Service mode
Q654-4

J319-B4

Cassette 3 size
sensor 4 (C3SZ4)

No. 202 2-a

PS5cu

J319-A6

Cassette right
door
open/closed
sensor
(CRDOP*)

No. 204 2-a

10-42

Display
indication

Voltage
reading
on meter

Draw out the
cassette
while in
standby, and
move the
detecting
lever by a finger; be sure
to set paper
selection to
cassette 3.

The lever is moved.

0

—

When the lever is
not moved.

1

—

Open the
right door
while in
standby.

The lever is moved.

0

—

The lever is not
moved.

1

—

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

4. Adjusting the Multifeeder Paper Width Sensor
Store the characteristic of the multifeeder paper width sensor in service mode (501).
Perform the adjustment when you have replaced the sensor if the sensor fails to
identify the paper size correctly.
1) Open the front door, and insert the door switch actuator into the door switch.
2) Press the service mode switch (SW302) with a hex key.
• The copier activates service mode, and indicates ‘1’.
3) Press [5] on the keypad.
• The copier indicates ‘5’.
4) Press the AE key.
• The copier activate specification settings mode, and indicates ‘501’.
5) Press the Start key.
• The copier indicates ‘A3’.
6) A press on the keypad changes the indication as shown in Table 10-201. Select the
size of paper to change. (Do not select CLR.)
• The indication will start to flash if you select a size which has not been stored.
• If you press the Start key when ‘CLR’ is indicated, the copier clears all stored settings
and returns the default settings.
7) Shift the guide on the multifeeder to suit the size to be stored.
• Be sure to hear a click.
8) Press the AE key.
• When the setting is stored, the indication stops flashing and remains on.
9) Press the Reset key.
• The copier de-activates service mode.
Key
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Indication
A3
Ldr
b4
LGL
A4r
b5r
A5r
Sr
JPC

0

CLr

Remarks
A3
Ledger
B4
Legal
A4R
B5R
A5R
Statement R
Postcard
(100 mm wide)
Clear (Clears settings)

Table 10-201
Reference:
1. When storing JPC (No. 9), adjust the guide width to the smallest width.
2. At time of shipment, the settings are A3, A4R, and JPC; the copier retains the
characteristics curves of the corresponding three points and uses them when
identifying the size of paper during copying operation. When you store a size other
than these three, the copier takes the new settings into account when making
computations; for this reason, it is best to store sizes that the user tends to use most
frequently.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-43

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

5. Setting the Paper Size for the Universal Cassette
If the paper size lever for the cassette is at the universal cassette, set the appropriate
paper size in service mode (505).
1) Open the front door, and insert the door switch actuator into the door switch.
2) Press the service mode switch (SW302) with a hex key.
• The copier activates service mode, and indicates ‘1’.
3) Press [5] on the keypad.
• The copier indicates ‘5’.
4) Press the AE key.
• The copier enters machine settings mode, and indicates ‘501’.
5) Press [0] and [5] on the keypad.
• The copier indicates ‘505’.
6) Press the Start key.
• The copier indicates the current setting for the universal cassette.
7) Select the size to store using the keypad according to Table 10-202.
8) Press the AE key to store the new setting.
9) Press the Reset key.
• The copier de-activates service mode.
Keypad
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

Paper
Bolivian
OFFICIO
Argentine
OFFICIO
Argentine
LEGAL
Australian
FOOLSCAP
FOOLSCAP
FOLIO
Government
LEGAL
Ecuadorian
OFFICIO
OFFICIO
Argentine
LTTER-R
Korean
Government-R
Government
LETTER-R
Argentine
LETTER
Government
LETTER
Korean
Government

Size
355.0 x 216.0
340.0 x 220.0
340.0 x 220.0
337.0 x 206.0
330.2 x 215.9
330.0 x 210.0
330.2 x 203.2
320.0 x 220.0
317.0 x 216.0
280.0 x 220.0
268.0 x 190.0
266.7 x 203.2
220.0 x 280.0
203.2 x 266.7
190.0 x 268.0

Table 10-202
10-44

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

III. TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS
A. Initial Checks
1. Site Environment
a. Make sure that the power supply is as specified (±10%).
b. Avoid high temperature/humidity conditions; near water faucets, water boilers, and
humidifiers. Avoid areas subject to excessively low temperature, sources of fire, and
dust.
c. Avoid areas subject to ammonium gas.
d. Avoid areas subject to direct rays of the sun; otherwise, instruct the user to provide
curtains.
e. Make sure the room is well ventilated.
f. Make sure that the floor will keep the machine level.
Check the site to see if it complies with the above requirements.
2. Checking the Originals
Identify the problem as to whether it is caused by the machine or the original used.
a. Originals with a reddish tinge result in copies with poor contrast; for example, red
sheets and slips.
Reference:
The operation of the following heaters may be controlled by the user by changing
the respective settings; at time of shipment, the settings are at OFF—this means
the copier may remain connected or disconnected at night. If the use of any of the
heaters proves to be necessary because of unique site conditions, the copier
should remain powered at night without disconnecting its power plug.
• fluorescent lamp heater (accessory)
• lens mount heater
• No. 2 mirror mount heater
b. Diazo copies or originals with high transparency can result in copies that can be
mistaken for foggy copies. Originals prepared in pencil can result in copies that can
be mistaken for light copies.
3. Checking the Copyboard Cover and the Copyboard Glass
Check the copyboard cover and the copyboard glass for dirt; if soiled, clean them using
a solution of mild detergent or alcohol; if scratched, replace them.
4. Checking the Paper
a. Check if the paper is Canon-recommended paper.
b. Check if the paper is dry; try paper fresh out of the package.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-45

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

5. Others
Moving a machine which has been cooled in a storage room or the like in winter to
a warm room can lead to condensation inside the machine, causing various problems;
for instance,
a. condensation on the scanning system (glass, mirror, lens) leads to light images.
b. condensation in the charging system leads to electrical leakage.
c. condensation on the pick-up/feeding guide leads to feeding problems.
If condensation is noted, dry wipe the part or leave the machine alone powered for
60 min.

10-46

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-47

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

B. SAMPLES OF IMAGE FAULTS

not available

10-48

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

C. Troubleshooting Faulty Images
1. The copy is too light (half-tone only).
Cause

Step

Checks

Action

Results

1

Perform the Basic Image
Adjustment Procedure. Is the
problem corrected?

YES

End.

AE mechanism

2

Make copies in AE mode. Is the
density too low, i.e., is the copy
too light?

YES

Perform AE adjustment.

Developing
assembly

3

Is the developing cylinder coated
with a uniform layer of toner?

NO

Replace the developing
assembly.

Scanner

4

Clean the mirror, lens, and dustproofing glass. Is the problem
corrected?

YES

End.

NO

Replace the drum
cartridge.

Drum cartridge

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-49

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

2. The copy is too light (black solid also).
3. The copy is too light (overall, extremely).
Cause

Step

Checks

Results

Action

1

Perform the Image Basic
Adjustment Procedure. Is the
problem corrected?

YES

End.

2

Turn off the power switch during
copying operation, and open the
front door. Is the toner image on
the photosensitive drum before
transfer more or less normal?

NO

Go to step 7.

3

Is the transfer charging roller
securely inserted?

NO

Re-insert the transfer
charging roller.

4

Is electrical leakage noted on the
transfer charging roller?

YES

Check the transfer
charging roller.

5

Is dirt, crack, or scratch noted on
the transfer charging roller?

YES

Replace the transfer
charging roller.

6

Are the position and condition of
the pressure spring of the transfer
charging roller normal?

NO

Correct or replace the
spring.

Copy paper

7

Try fresh copy paper. Is the
problem corrected?

Lower transfer guide

8

Set the feeding assembly in
feeding position, and measure the
resistance between the lower
transfer guide and the base
(metal) of the transfer charging
assembly rail. Is the resistance 0
Ω?

1. The paper may be
moist; advise the
user on the correct
way of storing paper
2. Advise the user that
the use of paper not
of a type
recommended by
Canon may produce
images falling short
of expectations.

Transfer

Transfer
charging
roller

High-voltage
cord, highvoltage
transformer,
DC controller PCB

10-50

YES

Check if the lower
transfer guide is in
contact with a metal
portion (e.g., side plate
of the feeding assembly).

NO

1. Check the electrical
continuity of the highvoltage cord.
2. Check the highvoltage transformer
and the DC controller
PCB.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Transfer

Cause
Toner level,
toner level
detection
mechanism

Composite
power supply
PCB

Step

Checks

Results

Action

9

Take out the developing assembly,
and shake it. Is the problem
corrected?

YES

The level of toner may
be too low or the toner
level detection
mechanism may be
faulty; advise the user to
replace the toner
cartridge.

10

Is the reading in service mode
(105; primary current) 10 µA or
less?

YES

Replace the composite
power supply PCB.

NO

Replace the toner
cartridge.

Drum cartridge

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-51

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

4. The copy has uneven density (front too dark).
5. The copy has uneven density (front too light).
Cause

Step

Checks

Action

Results

Scanner

1

Clean the scanning lamp, reflecting plate, side reflecting plate,
mirror, lens, and dust-proofing
glass. Is the problem corrected?

YES

End.

Primary
charging roller

2

Execute ‘No. 402’ in service mode
(primary charging roller cleaning).
Is the problem corrected?

YES

End.

Transfer charging assembly

3

Execute ‘No. 403’ in service mode
(transfer roller cleaning). Is the
problem corrected?

YES

End.

4

Make several blank (white) copies.
Is the problem corrected?

YES

End.

5

Is the transfer changing roller
securely inserted?

NO

Re-insert the charging
roller.

6

Are the position and condition of
the pressure spring of the transfer
charging roller normal?

NO

Corrector replace the
spring.

Pre-exposure
lamp

7

Does the pre-exposure lamp turn
on during copying operation?

NO

See “The pre-exposure
lamp fails to turn on.”

Developing
assembly

8

Is the developing cylinder coated
with a uniform layer of toner?

NO

Take out the developing
assembly, and shake it
several times; then,
make copies. If the
problem is not corrected,
replace the developing
assembly.

10-52

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

6. The copy is foggy (overall).
Cause

Step

Checks

Results

Action

1

Perform the Basic Image
Adjustment Procedure. Is the
problem corrected?

YES

End.

Scanner

2

Clean the scanning lamp, reflecting plate, side reflecting plate,
mirror, lens, and dust-proofing
glass. Is the problem corrected?

YES

End.

Pre-exposure
lamp, DC
controller PCB

3

Does the pre-exposure lamp turn
on during copying operation?

NO

See “The pre-exposure
lamp fails to turn on.”

Developing
spacer

4

Is the developing spacer worn?

YES

Replace the developing
assembly.

Developing
cylinder

5

Is the developing cylinder worn?

YES

Replace the developing
assembly.

Developing
cylinder

6

Is the developing cylinder
insulated from the copier GND?
Turn off the power supply, and
disconnect J908. Check the
continuity with the meter between
the developing and copier sides of
J908-2.

NO

Check the parts around
the developing cylinder
and the developing
connector.

Drum cartridge

7

Is the reading for ‘No. 105’ in
service mode (primary charging
current) 10 µA or less?

NO

Replace the drum
cartridge.

YES

Replace the composite
power supply PCB.

Composite
power supply
PCB

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-53

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

7. The copy is foggy (vertical).
8. The copy has black lines (vertical; thick fuzzy lines).
Cause

Step

Checks

Results

Action

1

Perform the Image Adjustment
Basic Procedure. Is the problem
corrected?

YES

End.

Primary
charging roller

2

Execute ‘No. 402’ in service mode
(primary charging roller cleaning).
Is the problem corrected?

YES

End.

Scanner

3

Clean the scanning lamp, reflecting plate, side reflecting plate,
lens, mirror, and dust-proofing
glass. Is the problem corrected?

YES

End.

Pre-exposure
lamp

4

Clean the pre-exposure lamp. Is
the problem corrected?

YES

End.

Developing
assembly

5

Is the developing cylinder coated
with a uniform layer of toner?

NO

Replace the developing
assembly.

YES

Check and clean the
fixing assembly.

Fixing
assembly

9. The copy has black lines (vertical, fine).
Action

Step

Checks

Results

1

Make a copy, and turn off the
power switch while the paper is in
the feeding assembly. Are black
lines noted on the copy before it
moves through the fixing
assembly?

NO

Go to step 3.

Transfer guide

2

Is the transfer guide soiled (in particular, the upper transfer guide) ?

YES

End.

Photosensitive
drum

3

Are scratches or black lines noted
around the photosensitive drum?
Try wiping the photosensitive
drum with a flannel cloth coated
with toner. Do the lines disap
pear?

YES

Replace the drum
cartridge. If scratches
are found, investigate
the cause.

NO

Check the exposure
system.

Are there scratches or black lines
on the upper fixing film?

YES

Replace the upper fixing
unit.

NO

Check the inlet of the
fixing assembly for dirt.

Cause

Exposure
system
Fixing
assembly

10-54

4

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

10. The copy has white spot (vertical).
11. The copy has white lines (vertical).
Step

Checks

Results

Action

Fixing
assembly

1

Make a copy with the copyboard
cover lifted, and turn off the power
switch while the paper is moving
through the feeding assembly. Are
white spots or liens noted on the
copy before it moves through the
fixing assembly?

NO

1. Clean the inlet guide
(upper, lower) of the
fixing assembly.
2. Check the upper
fixing unit.

Primary
charging roller

2

Execute ‘No. 402’ in service mode
(primary charging roller cleaning).
Is the problem corrected?

YES

End.

Transfer
charging roller

3

Execute ‘No. 409’ in service mode
(transfer roller cleaning). Is the
problem corrected?

YES

End.

4

Is dirt, cracks, or scratches noted
on the transfer charging roller?

YES

Replace the transfer
charging roller.

5

Are the position and condition of
the transfer charging roller
pressure spring normal?

NO

Correct or replace the
spring.

Static
eliminator

6

Clean the static eliminator. Is the
problem corrected?

YES

End.

Developing
assembly

7

Is the developing cylinder coated
with a uniform layer of toner?

NO

Take out the developing
assembly, and shake it
several times. If the
problem is not corrected,
replace the developing
assembly.

Copy paper

8

Try fresh copy paper. Is the
problem corrected?

YES

The copy paper may be
moist; advise the user
on the correct method of
storing paper.

Photosensitive
drum

9

Are there scratches around the
photosensitive drum?

YES

Replace the drum
cartridge. (Be sure to
investigate the cause of
the scratches.)

NO

Check if the photosensitive drum is exposed to
light from outside.

Cause

Light from
outside

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-55

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

12. The copy has white spots (horizontal).
Step

Checks

Results

Action

Toner level

1

Take out the developing assembly,
and shake it several times. Is the
problem corrected?

YES

The toner level may not
be adequate; advise the
user.

Photosensitive
drum

2

Is the problem noted at intervals
of about 9.4 cm (scratches in the
photosensitive drum)?

YES

1. Clean the drum.
2. If scratches are found
on the drum, replace
the drum cartridge.

Primary
charging roller

3

Is the problem noted at intervals
of about 5.1 cm?

YES

Check the primary
charging roller for
scratches and dirt.

4

Execute ‘No. 402’ in service mode
(primary charging roller cleaning).
Is the problem corrected?

YES

End.

5

Execute ‘No. 403’ (transfer roller
cleaning) in service mode. Is the
problem corrected?

YES

End.

6

Is the problem noted at intervals
of about 5.1 cm?

YES

Check the transfer
charging roller for dirt
and scratches.

7

Is dirt, cracks, or scratches noted
on the transfer charging roller?

YES

Replace the transfer
charging roller.

8

Are the position and condition of
the transfer charging roller
pressure spring normal?

NO

Correct or replace the
spring.

Copy paper

9

Try fresh copy. Is the problem
corrected?

YES

The paper may be moist;
advise the user on the
correct method of storing
paper.

Scanner rail,
scanner cable

10

Is the problem noted at the same
location on all copies?

YES

1. Check the scanner
rail for foreign matter.
2. Adjust the tension of
the scanner cable.

Cause

Transfer
charging roller

10-56

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

13. The back of the copy is soiled.
Cause

Transfer
charging roller

Durm cartridge

Step

Checks

Action

1

Turn off the power switch while
paper is moving through the
feeding assembly. Is the back of
the copy soiled?

NO

Go to step 7.

2

Execute ‘No. 403’ in service mode
(transfer roller cleaning). Is the
problem corrected?

YES

End.

3

Make several solid white copies. Is
the problem corrected?

YES

End.

4

Is the transfer charging roller
soiled excessively?

YES

Replace the transfer
charging roller.

5

Is the problem noted norizontally
at intervals of about 4.2 cm?

YES

1. Clean the registration
roller and transfer
guide.
2. Check the drum
cartridge for leakage
of toner.

6

Is the problem noted vertically at
intervals of about 1.6 cm?

YES

1. Clean the manual
feed roller.
2. Check the drum
cartridge for leakage
of toner.

NO

1. Clean the cleaning
assembly.
2. Check the drum
cartridge for leakage
of toner.

YES

Clean the fixing pressure
roller and the fixing film.

NO

Clean the delivery roller
and the fixing assembly
paper guide plate.

Drum cleaning
assembly
(drum
cartridge)
Fixing
assembly

Results

7

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

Is the fixing pressure roller or the
fixing film soiled with toner?

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-57

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

14. The copy has a fixing fault.
Cause

Step

Checks

Results

Action

Fixing film

1

Is the problem noted vertically?

YES

Check the fixing film for
scratches.

Lower fixing
roller pressure

2

Is the nip of the fixing assembly
within specification? (Use ‘No.
402’ of service mode.)

NO

Replace the lower fixing
roller pressure spring.

YES

Try recommended
paper; if the results are
good, advise the user to
use recommended
paper.

Copy paper

15, 16, 17

The leading edge of the copy is displaced.

Cause

Step

Checks

Action

Results

Original

1

Is the original placed correctly?

NO

Re-place the original.

Copy paper

2

Is the copy paper of a type
recommended by Canon?

NO

Try recommended
paper; if the results are
good, advise the user to
use recommended
paper.

Pick-up roller,
separation pad

3

Has the pick-up roller or the
separation pad of the cassette
which caused the problem
reached its average life?

YES

Check the rollers, and
replace those worn.

NO

1. Check if paper is
correctly set in the
cassette.
2. Check the paper
guide for foreign
matter.

4

Does each registration roller rotate
normally?

NO

See “The registration
roller fails to rotate.”

5

Adjust the registration (leading
edge margin; ‘No. 305’ in service
mode). Is the problem corrected?
(See p. 10-5.)

YES

End.

Cassette, paper
guide plate

Registration

10-58

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

18. The copy has a blurred image.
Cause

Step

Checks

Results

Action

Scanner drive
cable

1

Does the cable overlap on the
cable pulley while the scanner is
moving? Is the cable too loose or
too tight?

YES

1. Re-route the cable.
2. If the cable is twisted
or frayed, replace it.

Scanner rail

2

Is the scanner rail soiled? Is
foreign matter found on the
scanner rail?

YES

Clean the surface of the
scanner rail.

Scanner drive
system

3

Is the gear of the scanner drive
assembly chipped?

YES

Replace the gear.

Photosensitive
drum

4

Is the problem noted at intervals
of about 9.4 cm?

YES

1. Check the drum drive
gear.
2. Check the drum end,
where it comes into
contact with the
developing spacer, for
scratches or
protrusions.

Developing
gear

5

Is the problem noted at intervals
of about 4.2 cm?

YES

Check the developing
assembly.

NO

Check the drum drive
assembly.

Drum drive
assembly

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-59

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

19. The copy is foggy (horizontal).
Cause

Step

Checks

Results

Action

1

Is the problem noted at the same
position on all copies made in
Direct?

YES

Go to step 5.

Scanning lamp

2

Does the scanning lamp flicker
when the scanner is moving
forward?

YES

Check the scanning
lamp.

Developing
assembly spacer

3

Check the developing assembly
spacer for toner adhesion or
deformation. Is toner noted on the
portion (photosensitive drum
surface) where the developing
assembly spacer comes into
contact?

YES

Clean or, as necessary,
replace the developing
assembly.

Development
bias

4

Is the development bias applied
normally?

NO

Re-insert the developing
assembly; then, check
the wiring.

Scanner

5

Make reduced copies, and check
them against copies made in
Direct. Is the problem noted at
different positions?

YES

Check the scanner.

NO

Check the feeding
assembly.

Feeding
assembly

10-60

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

20. The copy has poor sharpness.
Cause

Step

Checks

Results

Action

Original

1

Is the original off the glass
surface?

YES

1. Check the copyboard
cover for warping.
2. Advise the user how
to place an original.

Copyboard
glass

2

Is copyboard glass stained with
oil? Is the copyboard glass
attached correctly?

YES

• Clean the copyboard
glass.
• Re-attach the
copyboard glass.

Lens drive
assembly

3

Turn off and on the power switch.
Does the lens move smoothly?

NO

Check the lens drive
assembly.

Transfer
charging roller

4

Execute ‘No. 403’ in service mode
(transfer roller cleaning). Is the
problem corrected?

YES

End.

5

Is the transfer charging roller
securely inserted?

NO

Re-insert the charging
roller.

6

Is dirt, cracks, or scratches noted
on the transfer charging roller?

YES

Replace the transfer
charging roller.

7

Are the position and condition of
the transfer roller pressure spring
normal?

NO

Correct or replace the
spring.

Drum cartridge
Developing
assembly

8

Is the drum cartridge securely
set? (Check if the spacer for the
developing assembly is in contact
with the photosensitive drum
under pressure.)

NO

Replace the drum
cartridge or the
developing assembly.

Development
bias

9

Is the development bias generated
normally?

NO

• Replace the composite
power supply PCB.
(Replace the DC con
troller PCB.)

Mirror

10

Is the horizontal reproduction ratio
in Direct with on specification?

NO

Adjust the position
between No. 1 and No. 2
mirrors.

YES

Clean the scanning
lamp, reflecting plate,
mirrors, lens, and dustproofing glass.

Scanner

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-61

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

21. The copy is blank.
Cause

Step

Drum cartridge

1

Is the drum cartridge securely
inserted?

NO

Insert the drum
cartridge.

Drum drive
assembly

2

Is the drum cartridge rotating
during copying operation?

NO

1. Check if the
photosensitive drum
rotates smoothly.
2. Check the drum drive
assembly.

Transfer charging assembly

3

Is the transfer charging roller
securely inserted?

NO

Re-insert the transfer
roller.

4

Is electrical leakage noted on
the transfer charging roller?

YES

Check the transfer
charging roller.

5

Is the reading in ‘No. 105’ of
service mode (primary charging current) 10 µA or less?

YES

Replace the composite
power supply PCB.

Composite
power supply
PCB

Results

Checks

Action

22. The copy is solid black.
Cause

Composite
power supply
PCB

10-62

Step

Checks

Results

Action

1

Does the scanning lamp remain
on during copying operation?

NO

Make checks according
to the descriptions under
“The scanning lamp fails
to turn on.”

2

Does the pre-exposure lamp turn
on during copying operation?

NO

Make checks according
to the descriptions under
“The pre-exposure lamp
fails to turn on.”

3

Is the reading in ‘No. 105’ of
service mode (primary charging
current) 10 µA or less?

YES

Replace the composite
power supply PCB.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

IV. TROUBLESHOOTING MALFUNCTIONS
A. Troubleshooting Malfunctions
1. E000
Action

Step

Checks

Results

J47
(relay
connector to
thermistor)

1

Disconnect the connector (J4) of
the fixing heater, and press the
power switch while holding down
the service mode switch. (This
clears E000; about 2 sec later,
the power switch turns off
automatically. Is the connection of
J47 (4-pin connector near the rear
side plate fixing assembly)
connected properly?

NO

Re-connect it.

Thermistor

2

Let the fixing assembly cool
sufficiently, and disconnect J47. Is
the resistance between J47-1 and
-2 on the thermistor side about
1.4 M and resistance between
J47-3 and -4 about 3.7 M ?

NO

Replace the fixing upper
unit.

Heater

3

Is electrical continuity present
between J4-1 and -2?

NO

Replace the fixing upper
unit.

Thermistor

4

Replace the upper fixing unit. Is
the problem corrected?

YES

End.

Fixing heater
driver PCB

5

Replace the fixing heater driver
PCB. Is the problem corrected?

YES

End.

NO

Replace the DC
controller PCB.

Cause

DC controller
PCB

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-63

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

2. E001
Step

Checks

Results

Action

Thermistor

1

Disconnect the connector (J4) of
the fixing heater, and press the
power switch while holding down
the service mode switch. (This
clears E001; about 2 sec later,
the power switch turns off
automatically.) Let the fixing
assembly cool sufficiently; then,
disconnect J4. Is the resistance
between J47-1 and -2 about 0
and the resistance between J47-3
and-4 about 0 ?

YES

Replace the fixing upper
unit.

Fixing heater
driver PCB

2

Replace the fixing heater driver
PCB. Is the problem corrected?

YES

End.

NO

Replace the DC
controller PCB.

Cause

DC controller
PCB

3. E002, E003
Step

Checks

Results

1

Disconnect the connector (J4) of
the fixing heater, and press the
power switch while pressing the
service mode switch. (This clears
the E code; about 2 sec later, the
power switch turns off
automatically.) Turn on the power
switch; is E000 indicated?

YES

See the descriptions
under “E000.”

Wiring

2

Is the wiring between J304 and
J47 on the DC controller PCB
proper?

NO

Correct the wiring.

DC controller
PCB

3

Replace the DC controller PCB. Is
the problem corrected?

YES

End.

NO

Replace the fixing heater
driver PCB.

Cause

Fixing heater
driver PCB

10-64

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

Action

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

4. E004
Cause
Fixing heater
driver PCB

Step
1

Checks

Replace the fixing heater driver
PCB. Is the problem corrected?

DC controller
PCB

Results

Action

YES

End.

NO

Replace the DC
controller PCB.

5. E007
Cause

Step

Checks

Results

Action

Fixing film

1

Is the fixing film cut or torn?

YES

Replace the fixing upper
unit

Fixing film
tension roller
pressure

2

Does the problem occur when the
fixing film or the upper fixing unit
has been replaced?

YES

Adjust the fixing roller
pressure. (See p. 10-28.)

Fixing film

3

Have as many as 200,000 copies
been made?

YES

Replace the upper fixing
unit.

Fixing film
sensor

4

Is the tension spring of the fixing
film detecting lever normal?
Does it move smoothly?

NO

Correct the spring.

Fixing film
sensor (PS9)

5

Is the fixing film sensor (PS9)
normal?

NO

Check the wiring
between connectors
J304 and PS9 on the DC
controller PCB; if
normal, replace PS9.

Fixing film
motor (M4)

6

Replace the fixing film motor
(M4).
Is the problem corrected?

YES

End.

NO

Replace the DC
controller PCB.

DC controller
PCB

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-65

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

6. E010
Cause

Main motor unit
(M1; refers to
main motor and
main motor
driver PCB as
single entity)

Step

Action

Results

Checks

1

Does the main motor rotate until
E010 is turned on?

NO

Go to step 3.

2

Set the meter to the 12VDC
range. Does the voltage between
J303-3 (+; MMD) and J303-2 (-; 0
V) on the DC controller PCB
change from about 0 V to about
2.6 V or from about 5 V to about
2.6 V when the Copy Start key is
pressed or when WMUPR starts?

NO

Replace the main motor
unit (M1).

YES

Check the contact of the
connector (J502) on the
motor driver PCB and
the wiring from J502 to
the connector (J303) on
the DC controller PCB; if
normal, replace the main
motor unit or the DC
controller PCB.

DC controller
PCB

Drive belt

3

Is the drive belt routed properly?

NO

Re-route the belt.

DC power
supply

4

Is the voltage between the
following connectors of the motor
driver PCB normal?
J501-1 (+; 34 V) and J501-2 (-; 0
V)

NO

Check the wiring
between the connector
(J206) on the composite
power supply PCB and
the connector J501) on
the motor driver PCB; if
normal, see “DC power
supply is absent.”

Main motor unit

5

Replace the main motor unit. Is
the problem corrected?

YES

End.

NO

Replace the DC
controller PCB.

DC controller
PCB

7. E030
Cause

Step

Checks

Results

1

Is the total copy counter operating
normally?

NO

See “The copy counter
fails to operate.”

YES

Replace the DC
controller PCB.

DC controller
PCB

10-66

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

Action

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

8. E064
Cause

Step

Checks

Results

Action

Wire

1

Turn off and on the power switch,
and set ‘1’ as the copy count. Is
E064 indicated after copying
operation?

YES

Check the harness
between the DC
controller PCB and the
composite power supply
PCB.

Composite
power supply
PCB

2

Set ‘1’ as the copy count, and
press the Copy Start key once
again. Is E064 indicated after
copying operation?

YES

Go through steps 3
through 6; then, replace
the composite power
supply PCB.

Transfer charging assembly,
Transfer
charging roller

3

Is a fault noted in the transfer
charging assembly/transfer roller
or contacts?

YES

Replace the transfer
corona assembly/transfer
roller.

Primary
charging roller

4

Detach the drum cartridge, and
check the primary charging roller.
Is a fault noted in the primary
charging roller or the contacts?

YES

Replace the drum
cartridge.

High-voltage
cable

5

Detach the rear cover, and check
the high-voltage cable. Is a
scratch or crack found in the highvoltage cable?

YES

Replace the high-voltage
terminal.

Results

Action

Is the scanner at home position
when E202 is indicated?

NO

See “The scanner fails to
move forward/
in reverse.”

Is the scanner home position
sensor (PS1) normal? (See
descriptions on how to check
photointerrupters.)

NO

Check the wiring
between the DC
controller PCB and PS1;
if normal, replace PS1.

YES

Replace the DC
controller PCB.

9. E202 (keys on control panel invalidated)
Cause

Step
1

Scanner home
position sensor
(PS1)
DC controller
PCB check

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

Checks

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-67

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

10. E210
Cause

Step

Action

Results

Checks

1

Turn on the power switch. Does
the lens move?

NO

See “The lens fails to
move.”

Lens home
position sensor
(PS2)

2

Is the lens home position sensor
(PS2) normal? (See the
instructions on how to check
photointerrupters.)

NO

Check the wiring
between the connector
(J307) on the DC
controller PCB and the
lens home position
sensor (PS2); if normal,
replace PS2.

DC controller
PCB

3

Replace the DC controller PCB. Is
the problem corrected?

YES

End.

Step

Checks

Results

Action

1

Does the scanning lamp turn on?

NO

See “The scanning lamp
fails to turn on.”

2

Replace the DC controller PCB. Is
the problem corrected?

YES

Replace the DC
controller PCB.

NO

Check the wiring
between the DC
controller PCB and the
composite power supply
PCB; if normal, replace
the composite power
supply PCB.

Results

Action

11. E220
Cause

DC
controller
Composite
power supply
PCB

12. E240
Cause
DC controller
PCB

10-68

Step
1

Checks

Turn on and off the power switch.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

YES

End.

NO

Replace the DC
controller PCB.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

13. E261
Step

Checks

Results

Power supply
frequency

1

Turn off and on the power supply.
Is the problem corrected?

YES

End.
• If the problem occurs
frequently, advise the
user to obtain a
frequency stabilizer.

Composite
power supply
PCB

2

Replace the composite power
supply PCB. Is the problem
corrected?

YES

End.

NO

Replace the DC
controller PCB.

Cause

DC controller
PCB

Action

14. E710, E711, E712, E717
Cause

Step
1

Checks

Turn off and on the power switch.

DC controller
PCB

Results

Action

YES

End.

NO

Replace the DC
controller PCB.

15. E803
Cause

Step

Checks

Results

Action

Malfunction

1

Turn off and on the power switch.
Is the problem corrected?

YES

End.

DC controller
PCB

2

Replace the DC controller PCB. Is
the problem corrected?

YES

End.

NO

Replace the composite
power supply PCB.

Composite
power supply
PCB

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-69

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

16. AC power supply is absent.
Step

Checks

Results

Action

E code (E000,
E001, E002,
E003 E004)

1

Does an E code turn on when the
power switch is turned on, and the
power switch turn off within about
2 sec?

YES

Disconnect the
connector (J4) of the
fixing heater, and turn on
the power switch while
holing down the service
mode switch to clear the
E code; then, check the
error in ‘No. 108’ of
service mode for a
reference to the
appropriate description.

Power plug

2

Is the power plug connected
securely?

NO

Re-connect the power
plug.

Covers

3

Are the front door and the delivery
cover closed securely?

NO

Close the door or the
cover.

Main power
supply

4

Is the specified voltage present at
the power outlet?

NO

Advise the user that the
problem is not of the
copier.

5

Is the specified voltage present
between J1-1 and J1-2? (J1 is the
2-pin connector on the power cord
mount.)

YES

Go to step 7.

YES

Remove the cause; turn
on the circuit breaker.

Cause

Is the circuit breaker on the
noise filter PCB off? (Use a
meter.)

Noise filter PCB
(circuit breaker)

6

Noise filter PCB

7

Is the specified voltage present
between J13-1 and J13-2? (J13 is
the relay connector located
between the noise filter PCB and
the door switch assembly.)

NO

Replace the noise filter
PCB.

Door switch
(DS1)

8

Detach the door switch (DS1),
and connect the probes of the
meter to F1 and F3 or F2 and F5
of the door switch (fastons). Is the
resistance about 0 Ω when the
actuator is pressed and ∞ Ω when
released?

NO

Replace the door switch
(DS1).

AC harness

9

Is the wiring between the door
switch and the composite power
supply PCB normal?

NO

Correct the wiring.

10-70

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Step

Checks

Results

Connector
(J211, J302,
J309)

10

Is electrical continuity present
between J211-1 on the composite
power supply PCB and J309-1 on
the DC controller PCB?

NO

Check the connector
(J302) on the DC
controller PCB; if
normal, replace the DC
controller PCB.

Control panel

11

Replace the control panel.

YES

End.

NO

Replace the DC
controller PCB.

Cause

DC controller
PCB

Action

17. DC power supply is absent.
Step

Checks

Results

Action

AC power
supply

1

Is AC power supply present
between the following terminals?
Composite Power Supply PCB
J2-1 (white) and J2-3 (black)
(J2 is the 3-pin connector on the
power supply cord mount.)

NO

See “AC power supply is
absent.”

Wiring, DC load

2

Turn off the power switch, and
disconnect all the following
connectors.
Composite Power Supply PCB
J206, J210
Set the meter to the 20V DC
range, and turn on the power
switch; is the voltage between the
following terminals normal?

YES

Turn off the power
switch, and connect one
of the disconnected
connectors; then, turn on
the power switch.
Repeat the same on all
connectors to find out
the connector which
activates the protection
circuit; check the wiring
from that connector to
the DC loads.

YES

Replace the fuse.

NO

Replace the composite
power supply.

Cause

Connector Pin No. Output
1
34V
J206
2
GND
J210

Fuse
Composite
power supply
PCB

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

1
2
3
4
5
6

24V
GND
5V
GND
34V
GND

Remarksr
to main
motor
driver PCB
DC con
troller PCB

Is the fuse of the composite
power supply PCB blown?

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-71

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

18. The blank shutter fails to move.
Cause

Step

Results

Checks

Action

Lens motor

1

Does the lens move?

NO

See “The lens fails to
move.”

Blank shutter
drive assembly

2

Is the drive of the lens motor
transmitted to the gear of the
blank drive assembly?

NO

Make corrections so that
the drive is transmitted.

Blank shutter
cable

3

Is the blank shutter cable routed
correctly?

NO

Re-route the cable.

19. The photosensitive drum fails to rotate.
Cause

Step

Action

Results

Checks

1

Is E010 indicated?

YES

See “E010.”

Drum cartridge

2

Re-insert the drum cartridge. Is
the problem corrected?

YES

End.

Belt

3

Is the belt fro drive routed correctly?

NO

Re-route the belt.

YES

Detach the main drive
assembly; correct or
replace pats as
necessary.

Main drive
assembly

10-72

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

20. The pick-up operation fails (from cassette).
Cause

Step

Checks

Results

Action

Paper (inside
cassette)

1

Is the paper inside the cassette
under the claws?

NO

Advise the user on the
correct method of setting
paper.

Cassette

2

Slide out and then in the cassette.
Is the problem corrected?

YES

End.
• Advise the user on
the correct way to set
the cassette.

Pick-up clutch
(CL2)

3

Does the pick-up roller rotate after
the copy Start key is pressed?

NO

Check the wiring from
the connector (J303) on
the DC controller PCB
and the pick-up clutch; if
normal, replace the
clutch.

Pick-up roller,
pick-up
separation pad

4

Is the life of the pick-up roller or
the pick-up separation pad at its
limit?

YES

Replace the pick-up
roller or the pick-up
separation pad.

DC controller
PCB

5

Replace the DC controller PCB. Is
the problem corrected?

YES

End.

21. The pick-up operation from the multifeeder fails.
Cause

Step

Checks

Results

Action

Multifeeder
pick-up clutch
(CL3)

1

Select the multifeeder, and press
the copy Start key. Does the
multifeeder pick-up roller rotate?

NO

Check the wiring; if
normal, replace CL3.

Paper guide
plate cam

2

Does the paper guide plate spring
up when the Copy Start key is
pressed?

YES

Check the position of the
paper guide plate cam
and separation pad; as
necessary, adjust or
replace.

Multifeeder
pick-up
solenoid (SL2)

3

Connect the (+) probe of the
meter to J306-11 on the DC
controller PCB. Does the voltage
change from about 24 V to about
0 V when the Copy Start key is
pressed?

YES

Check the wiring; if
normal, replace SL2.

NO

Replace the DC
controller.

DC controller
PCB

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-73

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

22. The scanner fails to move forward/in reverse.
Action

Step

Checks

Results

Cable

1

Is the cable for the scanner routed
correctly?

NO

Re-route the cable.

Scanner path

2

Is the scanner rail free of dirt, and
does the scanner move smoothly
when pushed by hand?

NO

Check the scanner rail
for dirt and foreign
matter; in addition check
for objects that may
come into contact with
the scanner.

Composite
power supply
PCB

3

Set the meter to the 50V DC
range. Does the index of the
meter point to 34 V when the (+)
probe is connected to JJ210-5
and the (-) probe is connected to
J210-6 on the composite power
supply PCB?

NO

See “DC power supply is
absent.”

DC controller
PCB

4

Replace the DC controller PCB. Is
the problem corrected?

YES

End.

Scanner motor

5

Replace the scanner motor. Is the
problem corrected?

YES

End.

Cause

23. The registration roller fails to rotate.
Step

Checks

Results

Registration
roller

1

Press the Copy Start key. Does
the registration roller rotate for
about 1 sec immediately after the
scanner starts to move forward?

YES

Check the drive
assembly of the
registration roller.

DC controller
PCB

2

Set the meter to the 30V DC
range. Is the voltage between
J303-5 (+) and J303-6 (-) on the
DC controller PCB change from
about 0 V to about 24 V when the
Copy Start key is pressed?

NO

Replace the DC
controller PCB.

YES

Check the wiring
between the DC controller PCB and CL1; if
normal, replace the CL1.

Cause

Registration
clutch (CL1)

10-74

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

Action

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

24. The scanning lamp fails to turn on.
Results

Cause

Step

Scanning lamp

1

Turn off the power switch, and
disconnect the power plug. Is the
lamp attached correctly?

NO

Re-attach the lamp.

Scanning lamp

2

Are the ends of the scanning lamp
black?

YES

Replace the scanning
lamp.

DC controller
PCB

3

Replace the DC controller PCB. Is
the problem corrected?

YES

Replace the DC
controller PCB.

NO

Check the wiring
between the DC
controller PCB and the
composite power supply
PCB; if normal, replace
the composite power
supply PCB.

Action

Checks

Composite
power supply
PCB

Action

25. The lens fails to move.
Step

Checks

Results

Change
solenoid
(SL1)

1

Turn off the power switch, and
detach the rear cover. Do the
change solenoid (SL1) turn on at
power-on? (Check with the naked
eye.)

NO

Check the wiring
between the DC
controller and SL1; if
normal, replace SL1.

Lens cable,
pulley, rail

2

Are the lens cable, pulley, and rail
normal?

NO

Check the lens cable,
pulley, and rail; as
necessary, clean or reroute the cable.

DC power
supply

3

Is 34 V being generated at the
J210-5 on the composite power
supply PCB?

NO

See “DC power supply is
absent.”

DC controller
PCB

4

Replace the lens motor. Is the
problem corrected?

NO

Replace the DC
controller PCB.

YES

End.

Cause

Lens motor
(M3)

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-75

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

26. The fixing heater fails to operate.
Cause

DC controller
PCB

Step

Results

Checks

Action

1

Is E000 indicated?

YES

See the descriptions
under “E000.”

2

Replace the DC control PCB. Is
the problem corrected?

YES

End.

NO

Replace the fixing heater
drive PCB.

Action

Fixing heater
driver

27. The pre-exposure lamp fails to turn on.
Step

Checks

Results

DC controller
PCB

1

Detach the drum cartridge, and
execute ‘No. 407’ in service mode.
Does the pre-exposure lamp turn
on normally?

NO

Replace the preexposure lamp.

Pre-exposure
lamp

2

Replace the pre-exposure lamp.
Does it turn on normally?

YES

End.

NO

Check the wiring
between the preexposure lamp and the
DC controller PCB; if
normal, replace the DC
controller PCB.

Cause

DC controller
PCB

28. The add paper indicator fails to turn off.
Cause

Step

Results

Checks

Action

Cassette

1

Is the cassette set correctly?

NO

Set the cassette
correctly.

Paper sensor

2

Is the following sensor normal
(p. 10-39~10-41)?
PS4:
cassette paper sensor
PS2cu: cassette 2 paper sensor
(accessory)
PS4cu: cassette 3 paper sensor
(accessory)

NO

Check the lever and
wiring; if normal, replace
the sensor.

YES

Replace the DC
controller PCB.

DC controller
PCB

10-76

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

29 The jam message fails to turn off.
Cause

Step

Checks

Results

Action

Paper

1

Identify which sensor has
detected the jam in ‘No. 107’ of
service mode (jam history). Is
paper found near the sensor?

YES

Remove the paper.

Sensor

2

Is the sensor identified in step 1
normal? (See p. 10-36.)

NO

Check the lever and the
wiring; if normal, replace
the sensor.

YES

Replace the DC
controller PCB.

DC controller
PCB

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-77

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

V. TROUBLESHOOTING FEEDING PROBLEMS
A. Jams (copy paper)
Jams tend to occur in the following locations of the copier:
q pick-up assembly
w separation/feeding assembly
e fixing/delivery assembly
The descriptions that follow, therefore, are organized according to each of the above
locations.
When a jam occurs, try to find out the location and the type of the jam in service
mode ([1]; No. 101).

e
q
w

Figure 10-501

10-78

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

1. Pick-Up Assembly
Step

Checks

Results

1

Did the jam occur when the paper
was picked up from the cassette?

NO

Go to step 8.

2

Is the cassette set in the copier
correctly?

NO

Set the cassette
correctly.

3

Try a different cassette. Is the
problem corrected?

YES

Check the inside of the
cassette for foreign
matter.

4

Is the copy paper curled or wavy?

YES

Replace the copy paper;
advise the user for the
correct method of storing
paper.

5

Try Canon-recommended paper.
Is the problem corrected?

YES

Advise the user to use
recommended paper.

DC controller
PCB, Pick-up
switch

6

Does the pick-up roller of the
selected cassette holder rotate
during copying operation?

NO

See “The pick-up
operation fails.”

Pick-up roller

7

Is the pick-up roller deformed or
worn?

YES

Replace the pick-up
roller.

8

Try manual copying. Does the
main motor rotate?

NO

See “The pick-up
operation fails.”

Registration
roller drive
assembly

9

Does the registration roller
operate normally?

NO

See “The registration
roller fails to rotate.”

Registration
roller, vertical
path roller

10

Is the registration roller or the
vertical path roller deformed or
worn?

YES

Replace the deformed or
worn roller.

Copy paper

11

Try Canon-recommended paper.
Is the problem corrected?

YES

Advise the user to use
recommended paper.

NO

Check the pick-up roller
for wear or deformation.

Cause

Cassette

Copy paper

Pick-up roller

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

Action

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-79

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

2. Separation/Feeding Assembly
Cause

Step

Checks

Transfer charging assembly

1

Is the transfer charging assembly
set correctly?

NO

Check the transfer
charging assembly.

2

Are there burrs on the paper guide
of the transfer charging assembly?

YES

Remove the burrs.

Copy paper

3

Try Canon-recommended paper.
Is the problem corrected?

YES

Advise the user to use
recommended paper.

Feed belt

4

Are the two feeding belts rotating
properly?

NO

Check the belt pulley.

YES

Check the feed belt for
deformation or wear.

Results

Action

3. Fixing/Delivery Assembly
Step

Delivery
assembly
separation claw

1

Lower fixing
roller, fixing
film

Delivery assembly

Fixing assembly

Cause

Results

Action

Is the separation claw worn or
deformed?

YES

1. Replace the
separation claw.
2. If dirt is found, clean
with solvent.

2

Is the lower fixing roller or the
fixing film deformed or worn?

YES

Replace the roller.

Paper guide

3

Is the paper guide soiled with
toner?

YES

Clean with solvent.

Nip

4

Is the lower roller pressure (nip)
within specification?

NO

Make adjustments.

Delivery
lever

5

Does the delivery detection lever
move smoothly?

NO

Make adjustments so
that the lever moves
smoothly.

Delivery
sensor
(PS1)

6

Does the delivery sensor operate
normally? (See the descriptions
on how to check the
photointerrupters.)

NO

Replace the sensor.

Delivery
roller drive
assembly

7

Does the delivery roller move
smoothly?

NO

Check the delivery roller
drive assembly.

YES

Check if a margin exists
along the leading edge of
the copy.

Checks

Leading edge
margin

10-80

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

B. Feeding Faults
1. Double feeding
Cause

Step

Checks

Results

Separation pad

1

Is the separation pad deformed or
worn?

YES

Replace the separation
pad.

NO

Push up the separation
pad, and try replacing
the spring.

Spring

Action

2. Wrinkling
Cause

Step

Checks

Results

Action

1

Turn off the power while copy
paper is moving through the
feeding assembly. At the time, is
wrinkling noted? Or, is the paper
moving askew?

YES

Check the pick-up
assembly; check the
registration roller.

Copy paper

2

Try fresh paper. Is the problem
corrected?

YES

The paper may be moist;
advise the user on the
correct method of storing
paper.

3

Is Canon-recommended paper
used?

NO

Advise the user to use
recommended paper.

Paper guide

4

Is the paper guide soiled with
toner or the like?

YES

Clean with solvent.

Lower roller
pressure

5

Is the lower roller pressure (nip)
within specification?

NO

Make adjustments.

YES

Try replacing the top unit
or the lower roller.

Fixing assembly

Pick-up
assembly

Top unit,
lower roller

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-81

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

VI ARRANGEMENT/FUNCTIONS OF THE
ELECTRICAL PARTS
A. Sensors

Figure 10-601

10-82

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Name

Ref.

Description

Photointerrupter

PS1
PS2
PS3
PS4
PS5
PS6
PS7
PS8
PS9
PS10
Q561
Q562
Q563
Q564

detects scanner home position
detects lens home position
detects blank shutter home position
detects presence/absence of paper in cassette
detects presence/absence of paper in multifeeder
detects paper in front of registration roller
detects paper in separation assembly
detects paper in delivery assembly
detects belt
detects right door (open/closed)
cassette size detection 1
cassette size detection 2
cassette size detection 3
cassette size detection 4

Toner sensor

ATS

detects toner inside developing assembly

Thermistor

TH1
TH2
TH3
TH4

fixing heater temperature detection 1
fixing heater temperature detection 2
fluorescent lamp temperature detection
ambient temperature detection

Volume

VR1

multifeeder paper width detection

Thermal fuse

FU1

fixing heater overheating detection

Symbol
PS

Table 10-601

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-83

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

B. Clutches, Solenoids, and Switches

Figure 10-602

10-84

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Symbol

Name
Clutch

CL1
CL2
CL3

registration clutch
pick-up clutch
multifeeder pick-up clutch

Solenoid

SL1
SL2
SL3
SL4
SL5

change solenoid
multifeeder holding plate solenoid
blank shutter
primary charging roller cleaning solenoid
transfer changing roller releasing solenoid

Push switch

DS1

door switch

Switch

SW1
SW2

anti-condensation switch
fluorescent lamp heater switch

Varistor

ZD1
ZD2

transfer guide varistor
attraction plate varistor

Counter

CNT1
CNT2

total copy counter
option counter

CL

SL

CNT

Description

Ref.

Table 10-602

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-85

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

C. Motors, Heaters, and Lamps

Figure 10-603

10-86

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Symbol

M

Name

Ref.

Description

Motor

M1
M2
M3
M4

main motor
scanning motor
lens motor
fixing belt motor

Fan motor

FM1

heat exhaust fan

Heater

H1
H2
R1

fixing heater
fluorescent lamp heater
lens heater

Fluorescent
lamp

FL1

scanning lamp

Lamp

LA1

pre-exposure lamp

Table 10-603

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-87

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

D. PCBs

Figure 10-604

10-88

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Ref.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Name
Noise filter
Composite power supply
DC controller
AE sensor
Intensity sensor
Control panel
High-voltage connector
Development bias connector
Heater driver
Heater on detection

Function
noise prevention
DC power supply, high-voltage generation
sequence control
original density detection
fluorescent lamp intensity detection
control panel keys, LEDs
charging, transfer, static eliminating power relay
development power relay
fixing heater drive
fixing heater drive detection

Table 10-604

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-89

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

E. Cassette Feeding Module – A2

CL1cu
PS1cu

1

PS3cu
M1cu

PS2cu

CL2cu

PS5cu
PS4cu

Q564-2
Q563-2
Q562-2
Q561-2
Q564-3
Q563-3
Q562-3
Q561-3

Hcu

Figure 10-605

10-90

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Ref.

Description

Photointerrupter

PS1cu
PS2cu
PS3cu
PS4cu
PS5cu
Q561-2
Q562-2
Q563-2
Q564-2
Q561-3
Q562-3
Q563-3
Q564-3

mcassette 2 vertical path detection
cassette 2 paper detection
cassette 3 vertical path detection
cassette 3 paper detection
cassette right door open/closed detection
cassette 2 paper size detection 1
cassette 2 paper size detection 2
cassette 2 paper size detection 3
cassette 2 paper size detection 4
cassette 3 paper size detection 1
cassette 3 paper size detection 2
cassette 3 paper size detection 3
cassette 3 paper size detection 4

M

Motor

M1cu

cassette unit motor

CL

Clutch

CL1cu
CL2cu

cassette 2 pick-up clutch
cassette 3 pick-up clutch

Heater

Hcu

cassette heater (accessory)

Symbol

Name

PS

q

Cassette driver

relay PCB

Table 10-605

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-91

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

F. Variable Resistors (VR) and Check Pins by PCB
Of all the VRs and check pins found in the copier, those that are needed in the field
are discussed.
Caution:
Do not touch the VRs and check pins that are not discussed herein; they are for
factory adjustment only and require special tools and instruments and must be
adjusted with high precision.

1. DC controller PCB

1

1 15

J302

1

1

J301

6

J310

15 11

1 J320

J313

1
B10 J319

B1
1
2

5 J318 1
A1

A10 SW303

1

J351
5

J321

31
J353 7

4

12

J303

20

J314

11

J309

1

J317 1 1

1 1 J305 6

3 J311 1 2

J306

7 J307 6 10

1

4

J356

15

J324

VR301

VR391
1 2

1 2

6

J308

VR302

J316 1 J315 7

1 12

J304

SW302

1

3 1

J312

8
J322

Figure 10-606

10-92

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

2. Composite power supply PCB

J212
1

J213
3

1

J210
2

1

J206
6

1

J205
2

1

5

2
J209
1
15
J211
1

LED501

3
J908
1
2
J906
1

J202
1

J204
2

1

3

Figure 10-607

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-93

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

VII. SERVICE MODE
A. Outline
The copier’s service mode may be classified into the following six:
Item

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]

Description

control display mode
I/O display mode
adjustment mode
operation/inspection mode
specification mode
counter mode
Table 10-701

B. Using Service Mode
1. Activating Service Mode
1) Open the front door, and insert the door switch actuator.
• If you want to make checks for I/O display mode or the like while making copies,
set the copy mode.
2) Press the service mode switch (SW302) on the DC controller with hex key.
• The copy count indicator indicates [1].
• While service mode is activated, the copy density indicator LED indicates the
position of the fixing belt.
• A press on the reset key de-activates service mode.

Figure 10-701

10-94

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

2. Selecting a Service Mode
1) While the copy count indicator is indicating [1], press a key from [1] through [6] to
select the appropriate mode.
2) Press the AE key.
• The copier activates the selected mode, and the copy count indicator indicates
‘301’ or the like; ‘301’ represents the first mode of those represented by [3].
3. Selecting Items
1) While the 100th digit on the copy count indicator is flashing (‘301’ or the like), press
the keypad to select the mode to execute.
• The copy count indicator indicates the selected number; only the 100th digit is
flashing.
• A press on the Clear key returns to selecting a mode ([3] or the like).
2) Press the Start key.
• The copier activates the specified mode.
4. Using Adjustment Mode [3] and Specification Mode [5]
1) Press the keypad, and change the setting.
• The value is flashed.
• If the value is a negative value, ‘%’ turns on. To enter a negative value, press the
% key, and then enter the number using the keypad.
2) Press the AE key.
• The copier stores the value, and flashes it.
• A press on the Start key starts copying operation.
3) To change the settings continuously, repeat steps 1) and 2).
4) A press on the Clear key returns to selecting items.
5. Using Operation/Inspection Mode [4]
1) A press on the Start key executes the selected service mode.
2) A press on the Stop key stops the operation and then returns to selecting items.
• If the mode is of a type that stops automatically, the operation stops and returns
to selecting items automatically.
6. Clearing Stored Error Code
If E000, E001, E002, E003, E004, or E007 is indicated, remove the cause of the
error, and clear the back-up information.
1) Open the front door, and insert the door switch actuator.
2) While holding down the service mode switch (SW302) on the DC controller with a hex
key, press the power switch.
3) In about 2 sec, the power goes off; press the power switch once again.
Note:
The copier turns itself off automatically if it detects E000, E001, E002, E003, or
E004, not responding to a press on the power switch. To check the error in service
mode, perform the above after disconnecting the connector of the heater.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-95

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

7. Recording on the Service Mode Label
Figure 10-702 shows the label attached behind the front door. At the factory, each
machine is adjusted, and the settings used at the time are recorded on the label.
You must record new settings if you changed them in the field. If you replaced the DC
controller, be sure to store the settings recorded on the label in service mode.
In addition, if you have replaced drun unit or the composite power supply, enter the
settings recorded on the service label attached to the new drum unit or composite
power supply and, at the same time, copy the setting on the service label (Figure 10702)
No.
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326

TYP
AE_LIGHT
AE_SHIFT
AE_SLOPE
HEATER
REGIST
LE_BLANK
REGIST_R
LE_BLANK_R
TE_BLANK
TE_BLANK_MF
B_HOME
B_HOME_RE
PRIMARY
IP_OFST
PW_OFST
IP_ADJ
PH_ADJ
ATVC_STD
MF_LOOP
C1_LOOP
C2_LOOP
C3_LOOP
C1_CL_OFF
C2_CL_OFF
C3_CL_OFF
LIGHT

Figure 10-702

10-96

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

C. Control Display Mode [1]
•
•
•

To select an item, press the appropriate key on the keypad and then the Start key.
To clear an item, press the Clear key.
A press on the Start key while a service mode is indicated executes the respective
operation.
Remarks

Description

No.
101

Jam location

The display indicates the location of the jam
on the copy count indicator; see below.

102

Fixing belt sensor ON time

unit:
ms
The actual ON time is the value that is
obtained by multiplying the indicated value
by 2.56; the copy density indicator indicates
the position of the belt.

103

Power supply voltage

unit:

104

Primary charging voltage

unit:
V
The actual primary charging voltage is the
value obtained by turning the displayed value
into negative and subtracting 1000 from it.

105

Primary charging current

unit:

106

Intensity

unit:
lux
The actual intensity (lux) is the value obtained
by dividing the displayed value by 100.

107

Jam history

See below.

108

Error history (E code)

The display indicates a history of the most
recent three errors; a press on [1], [2], or [3] on
the keypad indicates the most recent, second
recent, and third recent errors respectively.

109

Temperature detected by fixing main
thermistor (TH1)

unit:

°C

110

Temperature detected by fixing sub
thermistor (TH2)

unit:

°C

111

Temperature detected by ambient
thermistor (TH301; DC controller)

unit:

°C

112

AE sensor output

Normal if the value changes for each
original in AE mode.

113

ROM version number

Indicates the parts number of the ROM.

114

ROM release number

Indicates the version of the program.

116

Intensity at time of scanning

Normal: between 68 and 72

137

Factory mode

138

Factory mode

139

Factory mode

155

Factory mode

V

µA

Table 10-702
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-97

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

No. 101 Jam Location Indicator
In this mode, the copy count indicator turn on to indicate the type of jam. If both delay
and stationary are indicated for the same sensor, i.e., at time of power-on or standby, the
copier has detected copy paper when it was not making copies.
LED (ON)

2-a
2-f

1-a
1-f

2-b
2-g
2-e

1-b
1-g
1-e

2-c
2-d

1-c
1-d

Jam

1-a

pre-registration delay jam

1-b

pre-registration stationary jam

1-c

separation delay jam

1-d

separation stationary jam

1-e

delivery delay jam

1-f

delivery stationary jam

1-g

sorter jam

2-a

door open

2-b

cassette 2 pick-up delay jam

2-c

cassette 2 pick-up stationary jam

2-d

cassette 3 pick-up delay jam

2-e

cassette 3 pick-up stationary jam
Table 10-703

No. 104 Jam History
The 100th digit of the copy count indicator indicates how recent the jam is; to indicate
the jam that occurred second most recently, press [2] on the keypad. As in ‘No. 101’ (jam
location), the 10th digit indicates the type of jam.
Example:

10-98

The most recent jam is a preregistration delay jam.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

The second most recent jam is a door
open jam.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

D. I/O Mode [2]
•
•
•

Press [2] on the keypad and the AE key to activate I/O display mode.
To clear an item, press the Clear key.
A press on the Start key while a service mode is indicated executes the respective
operation.
Remarks

Description

No.
201

Port C digit 4

When the mode is activated, the copy count
indicator turns on to indicate the I/O of the
input port; see below.

202

Port C digit 5

When the mode is activated, the copy count
indicator turns on to indicate the I/O of the
input port; see below.

203

Port C digit 6

When this mode is activated, the copy
count indicator turns on to indicate the I/O
of the input port; see below.

204

Port C digit 7

When this mode is activated, the copy
count indicator turns on to indicate the I/O
of the input port; see below.

205

Port H

When this mode is activated, the copy
count indicator turns on to indicate the I/O
of the input port; see below.

206

Fixing main thermistor (TH1) voltage

Indicates the measurement of voltage using
0 through 255.

207

Fixing sub thermistor (TH2) voltage

Indicates the measurement of voltage using
0 through 255.

208

AE sensor voltage

Indicates the measurement of voltage using
0 through 255.

209

Ambient temperature thermistor
(TH301) voltage

Indicates the measurement of voltage using
0 through 255.

210

Multifeeder paper width sensor
voltage

Indicates the measurement of voltage using
0 through 255.

211

Intensity sensor voltage

Indicates the measurement of voltage using
0 through 255.

212

Copy density correction knob/switch
voltage

Indicates the measurement of voltage using
0 through 255.

213

Toner level sensor

Indicates the measurement of voltage using
0 through 255.

Table 10-12

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-99

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

LED (copy count indicator; from 201 to 205)
2-a

1-a

2-f

1-f
2-b

2-g

1-b
1-g

2-e

1-e
2-c

1-c
1-d

2-d

No. 201/202/203/204 Port C Digital Display
No.

201

202

203

10-100

LED
1-a
1-b
1-c
1-d
1-e
1-f
1-g
2-a
2-b
1-a
1-b
1-c
1-d
1-e
1-f
1-g
2-a
2-b
1-a
1-b
1-c
1-d
1-e
1-f
1-g
2-a
2-b

Description
Cassette 2 connect
Cassette 2 connect
Options counter open circuit
Jumper connector 3
Cassette size 1 (cassette 2)
Cassette size 2 (cassette 2)
Cassette size 3 (cassette 2)
Cassette size 4 (cassette 2)
Not used
Main motor lock
Control Card IV connect
Total counter connect
Option counter connect
Cassette size 1 (cassette 3)
Cassette size 2 (cassette 3)
Cassette size 3 (cassette 3)
Cassette size 4 (cassette 3)
Not used
Service mode switch
Jumper connector 1
Jumper connector 2
Total counter open circuit
Cassette size 1 (cassette 1)
Cassette size 2 (cassette 1)
Cassette size 3 (cassette 1)
Cassette size 4 (cassette 1)
Cassette 3 vertical path
sensor (PS3cu)

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

Remarks
ON:
ON:
ON:
ON:
ON:
ON:
ON:
ON:

connected
connected
open
connected
light-blocking
light-blocking
light-blocking
light-blocking

plate
plate
plate
plate

present
present
present
present

ON:
ON:
ON:
ON:
ON:
ON:
ON:
ON:

locked
connected
connected
connected
light-blocking
light-blocking
light-blocking
light-blocking

plate
plate
plate
plate

present
present
present
present

ON:
ON:
ON:
ON:
ON:
ON:
ON:
ON:
ON:

pushed
connected
connected
open
light-blocking
light-blocking
light-blocking
light-blocking
light-blocking

plate
plate
plate
plate
plate

present
present
present
present
present

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

No.

LED
1-a

Description
Right door open/closed
sensor (PS10)
Separation sensor (PS7)

1-b
1-c
1-d
204

1-e
1-f
1-g
2-a
2-b

ON:
ON:

Cassette paper sensor
(PS4)
Multifeeder paper sensor
(PS5)
Cassette 2 paper sensor
(PS2cu)
Cassette 3 paper sensor
(PS4cu)
Delivery sensor (PS8)

ON:

Cassette right door
open/closed sensor (PS5cu)
Cassette 2 vertical path
sensor (PS1cu)

ON:

ON:
ON:
ON:
ON:

ON:

Remarks
light-blocking plate present
present)
light-blocking plate present
closed)
light-blocking plate present
absent)
light-blocking plate present
absent)
light-blocking plate present
absent)
light-blocking plate present
absent)
light-blocking plate present
present)
light-blocking plate present
closed)
light-blocking plate present
present)

(paper
(right door
(paper
(paper
(paper
(paper
(paper
(right door
(paper

Table 10-13

No. 205 Port H Display
LED

Description

Signal

Connector

Remarks

1-a

Registration sensor

RPD

J314-2

ON: paper present

1-b

PCB check

PCBCH*

J353-6

For factory only

1-c

Lens home position sensor
(PS2)

LHP

J307-2

ON: at HP

1-d

Blank shutter home position
sensor (PS3)

BSHP

J315-2

ON: at HP

1-e

Fixing film sensor (PS9)

FFD

J304-12

ON film detected

1-f

Heater on detection
(triac short circuit)

HTON*

J324-2

ON: heater ON detected

1-g

Composite power supply ACK

CP-ACK

J302-12

ON: acknowledged

2-a

AC pulse

AC-MNTR

J302-14

ON: H, OFF: L

2-b

Table 10-14

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-101

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

E. Adjustment Mode [3]
•
•
•
•
•
•
No.

To activate adjustment mode, press [3] on the keypad and then the AE key.
To select an item, press the appropriate key on the keypad and then the Start key.
To change the setting, press the appropriate keys on the keypad and then the AE key.
To cancel an item, press the Clear key.
A press on the Start key executes the respective operation.
If the value is a negative value, ‘%’ is turned on; to enter a negative value, press
the % key and the value on the keypad.
Description

Remarks

Settings
See p. 10-11.

301

Automatic lamp intensity
adjustment for AE scans

302

Copy density (development bias)
reference point adjustment for
AE mode

-26 ~ +26

See p. 10-13.
default: 0

303

Copy density (development bias)
slope adjustment for AE mode

-26 ~ +26

See p. 10-13.
default: 0

304

Fixing heater resistance storage

305

Leading edge margin adjustment
(registration roller ON timing)

0 ~ 63

A higher value delays the copy
paper in relation to the image,
reducing the margin.
default: 32
unit: 0.27 mm

306

Leading edge non-image width
adjustment (timing at which
blank open/close shutter for
blank exposure is closed)

0 ~ 63

A higher setting increases the
leading edge non-image width.
default: 32
unit: 0.27 mm

307

Leading edge registration adjustment for right face in page separation (registration roller ON timing)

0 ~ 63

A higher setting delays the copy
paper in relation to the image.
default: 32
unit: 0.27 mm

308

Leading edge margin adjustment for
right face in page separation (timing
at which blank shutter is closed)

0 ~ 63

A higher setting increases the
leading edge margin.
default: 32
unit: 0.27 mm

309

Trailing edge non-image width
adjustment (timing at which
open/close shutter for blank
exposure is opened)

0 ~ 63

A higher setting reduces the trailing
edge margin.
default: 32
unit: 0.27 mm

310

Leading edge non-image width
for multifeeder (timing at which
the open/close shutter for blank
exposure is opened)

0 ~ 63

A higher setting reduces the trailing
edge margin.
default: 32
unit:
0.27 mm

See p. 10-31.

Table 10-15-1
Note: A press on the Start key when in No. 305, 306, 307, or 308 makes copies in
the mode that has been effective before the activation of the mode; when
executing No. 307 or 308, it is recommended that page separation mode be
selected before activating service mode.
10-102

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

No.

Description

311

Left/right margin adjustment
(Direct; home position for slide
shutter for blank exposure)

312

Settings

Remarks

0 ~ 15

A higher setting increases the
margin on both left and right.
default: 8
unit:
0.27 mm

Left/right margin adjustment
(Reduce; travel distance of slide
shutter for blank exposure)

-10 ~ +10

A higher setting increases the
margin on both left and right.
default: 0
unit:
0.27 mm

313

Primary output voltage correction
(corrects output voltage
determined by APVC)

-16 ~ +16

Enter the setting recorded on the label
after replacing the drum cartridge.

314

APVC measured current shift
(corrects the results of APVC)

-40 ~ +40

Enter the setting recorded on the label
after replacing the drum cartridge.

315

Voltage correction for
measurement in APVC (corrects
voltage for measurement applied
at time of APVC)

-16 ~ +16

default: 0
unit:
16 V
Enter the value recorded on the label
on the composite power supply when
replacing the composite power supply.

316

Measurement current correction
for APVC (corrects current
measured at time of APVC)

-10 ~ +10

default: 0
Enter the value recorded on the
label on the composite power
supply when replacing the
composite power supply.

317

Fluorescent lamp pre-heating
current adjustment

-9 ~ +9

default: 0
Enter the value recorded on the
label on the composite power
supply when replacing the
composite power supply.

318

Transfer output voltage
adjustment (corrects transfer
voltage determined by ATVC)

-4 ~ +4

Convert the value recorded on the
label on the composite power
supply as follows and change the
value recorded on the service label;
then, enter the value when replacing
the composite power supply.
Label
Input
Label
Input
→
0
6
→ +1
1
2
→ -1
7
→ +2
3
→ -2
8
→ +3
4
→ -3
9
→ +4
5
→ -4

319

Arch adjustment when
multifeeder is used (pick-up roller
OFF timing)

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

0 ~ 63

A higher setting increases the arch.
default: 25
unit:
0.27 mm

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-103

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

No.

Description

Settings

Remarks

320

Arch adjustment when cassette
2 is used (pick-up roller OFF
timing)

0 ~ 63

A higher setting increases the arch.
default: 25
unit:
0.27 mm

321

Arch adjustment when cassette
2 is used (pick-up roller OFF
timing)

0 ~ 63

A higher setting increases the arch.
default: 25
unit:
0.27 mm

322

Arch adjustment when cassette
2 is used (pick-up roller OFF
timing)

0 ~ 63

A higher setting increases the arch.
default: 25
unit:
0.27 mm

323

Pick-up clutch (CL2) off timing
adjustment

0 ~ 63

For factory only
default: 32

324

Cassette 2 pick-up clutch
(CL1cu) off timing adjustment

0 ~ 63

For factory only
default: 20

325

Cassette 3 pick-up clutch
(CL2cu) off timing adjustment

0 ~ 63

For factory only
default: 20

326

Scanning lamp intensity
adjustment

0 ~ 76

For factory only
default: 75

Table 10-15-2

10-104

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

F. Operation/Inspection Mode [4]
•
•
•
•
•

To activate operation/inspection mode, press [4] on the keypad and then the AE key.
To select an item, press the appropriate key on the keypad and then the Start key.
To execute the mode, press the Start key.
To stop the operation, press the Stop key; the copier returns to selecting an item.
If the mode is of a type that stops automatically, the copier automatically returns
to selecting an item.
Description

No.

Remarks
Use it after supplying toner at time of installation.

401

Developing assembly idle rotation

402

Primary roller cleaning

403

Transfer roller cleaning

404

Fixing tension roller

Use it to adjust the fixing film drive roller
pressure for the upper fixing unit. (See p. 1028.) Fix the fixing tension roller and cause the
fixing film to rotate idly. The ON period of the
fixing film sensor is indicated by the copy
count indicator, and the film position is
indicated by the copy density indicator.
Another press on the Start key checks the
position of the fixing film automatically.

405

Fixing film initial rotation mode

Execute the mode when you have replaced
the fixing film or the upper fixing unit to return
the fixing film to its appropriate position. (See
p. 10-28.) The film stops as soon as it
reaches the appropriate position automatically.
The position of the film in travel is indicated by
the copy density indicator.

406

Nip check

Use tit to check the nip or when adjusting the
lower fixing roller. (See p. 10-30.)

407

Fixing film displacement correction

The fixing film stops when it reaches the
appropriate position or when 30 sec has
passed. The position of the film in travel is
indicated by the copy density indicator, and
the fixing film ON period is indicated by the
copy count indicator. The position is normal if
the copy density indicator indicates ‘5’ when
the film stops; otherwise, check the fixing film
and the tension roller. If the fixing film
becomes displaced and E007 is indicated, try
this mode. (This will prove to be highly useful
if displacement occurs because of a minor
accident.)

408

Scanning lamp ON check

A press on the Start key keeps the lamp on
after about 1.5 sec.

409

Control panel indicators ON

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-105

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

No.

Remarks

Description

410

Scanner forward stop

411

Pre-exposure lamp on

412

Drum unit installation mode

Execute it when installing or replacing the
drum unit; a press on the Start key will
automatically activate APVC measurement
mode; the mode ends in about 23 sec.

450

Back-up RAM clear

See p. 10-35

Table 10-16

10-106

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

G. Specification Settings Mode [5]
•
•
•
•
•

To activate specification settings mode, press [5] on the keypad and then the AE key.
To select an item, press the appropriate key on the keypad and then the Start key.
To change the setting, press the appropriate keys on the keypad and then the AE key.
To clear an item, press the Clear key.
A press on the Start key executes the respective operation.

No.

Description

Remarks

501

Characteristics storage for
multifeeder paper width sensor

See p. 10-43.

502

Copy density notation switching
(9/17 steps)

9 steps: 0
17 steps:
1
default: 0 (9 steps)

503

Auto power-off cancel

• When ‘1’ is entered on the keypad, the
notation will be ‘ON’, activating the auto
power-off function.
• When ‘0’ is entered on the keypad, the
notation will be ‘OFF’, de-activating the auto
power-off function.
default: on.
The auto power-off period is set in user mode;
since the copier’s WAIT time is 0, it is best to
keep the auto power-off mechanism to be
enabled.

504

Copy count upper limit

settings: 0 to 99
default: 0
When set to ‘0’, the upper limit will be 100
copies.

505

Universal cassette paper size

See p. 10-44.
settings: 0 to 14
default: 0

506

Separation static eliminator output
voltage switching

002:
2.5 kV
004:
4 kV
default: 0

507

Fixing forced wait

When activated, the period of initial rotation is
increased; activate it if the fixing on the first copy
is poor because of low temperature conditions.
0: disabled
1: enabled
default: 0

508

Fixing control temperature
switching

001:
002:
003:
default:

225°C
215°C
200°C
002

See p. 10-32.

Table 10-17
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-107

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

H. Counter Mode [6]
•
•
•
•
•
No.

To activate the mode, press [6] on the keypad and then the AE key.
To select an item, press the appropriate key on the keypad and then the Start key.
To cancel an item, press the Clear key.
A press on the Start key executes the respective service operation.
To obtain the actual count, multiply the indication by 100.
Remarks

Description

601

Large copy counter

602

Small copy counter

603

Total copy counter/drum counter

For North America only; indicates the use of
the drum unit in terms of copies made, and
cleared when the drum unit is replaced.

Table 10-18

10-108

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

VIII. SELF DIAGNOSIS
A. Copier
The microprocessor on the copier’s DC controller is provided with a self diagnosis
mechanism that checks the condition of the machine (sensors, in particular). The copier
runs self diagnosis and, when it identifies an error, indicates a code that represents each
specific error. If the copier finds an error associated with E000, E001, E002, E003, and
E004, it automatically shuts itself off (error auto power-off).
Code

E000

Cause

Description

• Thermistor (TH1, TH2;
displacement, poor
contact, open circuit)
• Fixing heater (H1; open
circuit, crack)
• Thermal fuse (FU1;
malfunction)
• Triac (faulty)
• DC controller (faulty)
• Thermistor (TH1, TH2;
short circuit)
• Triac (faulty)
• DC controller (faulty)

E001

E002

• Thermistor (TH1, TH2;
displacement, poor
contact, open circuit)
• Fixing heater (H1; open
circuit, crack)
• Thermal fuse (FU1;
malfunction)
• Triac (faulty)
• DC controller (faulty)

• Beginning 1 second after the copy START key
is pressed, the main thermister (TH1) does
not reach 50°C for 200 ms.
• Beginning 2 second after the copy START key
is pressed, the main thermister (TH1) does
not reach 60°C for 200 ms.
• Beginning 4 second after the copy START key
is pressed, the main thermister (TH1) does
not reach 70°C for 200 ms.
• The detection temperature of the thermistor
(TH1) exceeds 250°C during copying operation.
• The detection temperature of the sub
thermistor (TH2) exceeds 260°C during
copying operation.
• The detection temperature of the thermistor
(TH1, TH2) rises 30°C over the specified
temperature during copying operation.
• The detection temperature of the thermistor
(TH1, TH2) rises 30°C over the specified
temperature during copying operation.
• The thermistor detects a rise in temperature of
40°C or more during standby.
• The temperature has increased over 100°C or
more within 1 sec after the thermistor (TH1,
TH2) has detected 100°C.
• Beginning 1 second after the main thermister
(TH1) detection temperature reaches 60°C, the
first thermister does not reach 70°C for 200 ms.
• Beginning 1 second after the main thermister
(TH1) detection temperature reaches 70°C, the
first thermister does not reach 80°C for 200 ms.
• Beginning 1 second after the main thermister
(TH1) detection temperature reaches 80°C, the
first thermister does not reach 90°C for 200 ms.
• Beginning 1 second after the main thermister
(TH1) detection temperature reaches 90°C, the
first thermister does not reach 95°C for 200 ms.

Table 10-19-1
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-109

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Code

E003
E004
E007
E010

Cause

Description

• Thermistor (TH1, TH2;
displacement, poor contact,
open circuit)
• Fixing heater (H1; open circuit,
crack)
• Thermal fuse (FU1;
malfunction)
• Triac (faulty)
• DC controller (faulty)
• Triac (faulty)
• Heater ON detection PCB
(faulty)
• Fixing film (displacement, tear)
• Tension roller (displacement,
malfunction)
• Fixing film motor (M4; faulty)
• Fixing film sensor (PS9; faulty)
• Main motor (M1; faulty)
• DC controller (faulty)

• After the main thermistor (TH1) detection
temperature reaches 95°C, the main thermister detects lower than 95°C for 200 ms.
• After the sub thermistor (TH2) detection
temperature reaches 70°C, the sub thermister detects less than 70°C for 200 ms.

• Counter (open circuit)
• DC controller (faulty)

E030
E064
E202
(keys on
control panel
disabled)

• Composite power supply
(faulty)
• DC controller (faulty)
• Scanner cable (displacement, tear)
• Scanner home position sensor
(PS1; faulty)
• Scanner motor (M2; faulty)
• DC controller (faulty)

The fixing heater is identified as being on
when the fixing heater drive signal is off
(HTRD=0).
The fixing film sensor output remains ‘1’ or
‘0’ for 1.35 sec or more.
Reference:
The fixing film takes about 1.3 sec to make
a full rotation.
The main motor revolution is not as specified (MLOCK=0) for 1 sec or more while the
main motor drive signal is on (MMD=1).
Checks are made immediately before the
counter turns on or off and when copying
operation is started.
Normal if drive signal = 0 at time the
counter turns on; Normal if drive signal = 1
at time the counter turns off.
Note: Checks are made only when the
counter is installed.
The high voltage of the composite power
supply is different from the setting.
The scanner does not return to the home
position within 5 sec when it is started.
E002 may be checked in ‘No. 108’ of
service mode.

Table 10-19-2

10-110

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Code

E210

E220
E240
E261
E710
E711
E712
E717

Cause

Description

• Lens cable (displacement, tear)
• Lens home position sensor
(PS2; faulty)
• Slide shutter (operation)
• Blank shutter home position
sensor (PS3; faulty)
• Change solenoid (SL1; faulty)
• Lens motor (M3; faulty)
• DC controller (faulty)

• The lens home position sensor signal
(LHP) is not generated within a specific
period of time after the power switch has
been turned on.
• The lens home position signal (LHP) is
generated longer than a specific period of
time.
• The blank shutter home position signal
(BSHP) is not generated when the slide
shutter is moving.
• The lamp is identified as being on during
standby.
• The lamp is identified as being off during
copying operation.
A communication error is detected between
the CPU (Q301) on the DC controller and the
CPU (Q512) on the composite power supply.
The intervals of the zero cross signal is
outside the tolerance.

• Scanning lamp (faulty)
• Composite power supply
(faulty)
• DC controller (faulty)
• DC controller (faulty)
• Composite power supply
(faulty)
• Power supply frequency
(fluctuation)
• Composite power supply
(faulty)
• DC controller (faulty)

The IPC (Q104) cannot be initialized at
power-on.

• DC controller (faulty)

An IPC communication error has been
detected twice within 1 sec.

• DC controller (faulty)
• DF controller (faulty)
• Connector (poor contact)
• DC controller (faulty)
• The Remote Diagnostic
Device II controller (faulty)
• Communication (with the
Remote Diagnostic Device II)

An error in communication with the DF
cannot be cleared.
• A communication with the Remote
Diagnostic Device II has been
successfully but failed in the middle.
• An open circuit is detected on the line with
the Remote Diagnostic Device II.

Table 10-19-3

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-111

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Clearing an Error Code (back-up data)
When the self diagnosis mechanism has been activated, the copier may be reset by
turning its power off and on. However, this does not work for E000, E001, E002, E003,
or E004; this arrangement is to prevent the user from causally resetting any of the errors,
which could damage the film or the heater in side the fixing assembly.
If E000, E001, E002, E003, or E004 is indicated, remove the cause and clear the
back-up data as follows:
1) Open the front door, and insert the door switch actuator.
2) Press the power switch while holding down the service mode switch (SW302) on the
DC controller with a hex key.
3) The power should go off in about 2 sec; turn on the power.
Caution:
Detection of E000, E001, E002, E003, or E004 automatically turns off the copier. To
check the type of error in service mode, go through the above steps after
disconnecting the fixing heater.

10-112

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

B. Self Diagnosis (ADF)
Code

E400
E402
E404
E411

Cause

Description

• data communication with
copier (error)

• belt motor (fails to rotate)
• belt motor clock sensor (faulty)
• delivery motor (fails to rotate)
• delivery motor clock sensor
(faulty)
• document detection (faulty)
• registration sensor (faulty)
• document edge sensor (faulty)

The data communication is monitored at all
times; the error is identified if the
communication with the copier is absent for
5 sec or more.
The belt clock pulses within 200 msec are
below the specified number.
The delivery motor clock pulses within
200 msec are below the specified number.
The output of the sensor is 2.3 V or more in
the absence of paper.

Table 10-20
Note:
To reset the copier after activation of the self diagnosis mechanism, switch the
copier off and then on.
You can still continue to make copies even when the ADF is out of order; simply
open the ADF, and set the documents on the copyboard glass.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-113

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

C. Self Diagnosis (sorter)
Code

E500
E510
E530

Cause

Description

The CPU or the communications IC on the sorter controller
is not operating normally.
The feeder motor fails to rotate.

An error is detected in the communication
between the sorter and the copier.

The stapler guide bar swing
motor fails to rotate.

The home position sensor does not turn off
after generation of 2560 pulses of the motor
drive signal.
• The stapler unit swing sensor does not
turn off within 0.5sec after generation of
the motor drive signal.
• The sensor does not turn on again within
1.0sec after the stapler unit swing sensor
has turned off.
• The reed cam home position sensor does
not turn off within 2.0sec after generation
of the motor drive signal.
• The reed cam home position sensor does
not turn on once again within
2.0sec after it has turned off.
The reed cam position sensor does not turn
on within 1.0 sec after it has turned off.

The stapler unit swing motor
fails to rotate.

E531
The bin shift motor fails to
rotate.

E540
E541

• Bin motor (faulty)
• Reed cam drive gear (faulty
mounting)

The clock signal from the motor is off for
250 msec or more.

Table 10-21
Note:
Some copiers use ‘E500’ to represent all the above errors.
■ Error Condition
q The copier indicates the “TURN ON POWER” message.
w When the power has been turned off and then on, the sorter runs a self check: if the
result is good*, it resets; otherwise, enters down state**.
■ Down State
q The copier indicates ‘E5XX’.
w When the sorter has been detached, the copier is available for operations other than
those that must use the sorter.
e If a mode that uses the sorter is selected, some copiers indicate the “MODE NOT
AVAILABLE” message.

10-114

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Note:
Even in down state, the sorter will run a self check and rest if the result is good if
you have switched it off and then on without detaching it from the copier.
* Simply turn off the joint sensor (MS3) to detach the sorter from the copier; you
need not disconnect the communication connector.
** When an E code is indicated.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10-115

CHAPTER 10 TROUBLESHOOTING

10-116

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAR. 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

APPENDIX

A.
B.
C.

GENERAL TIMING CHART ...............A-1
SIGNALS AND ABBREVIATIONS......A-2
GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM .........A-3

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

D.
E.

SPECIAL TOOLS ...............................A-5
SOLVENTS/OILS................................A-6

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

A. GENERAL TIMING CHART
(A4, 2 copies, Direct, from copier cassette)
Power switch
ON
Sequence

Copy start key
ON
STBY

INTR

SCFW

SCRV

SCFW

SCRV

LSTR

STBY

AER
Main motor (M1)
1 Pre-exposure lamp
2 Primary charging (APVC)
3 Primary charging bias
4 Scanning motor (M2)
5 Scanning lamp (FL1)
6 Image exposure
7 Blanking shutter solenoid
(SL3)
Transfer
reference bias
8
(ATVC)


QRST¢£¤¥,










,,,,,,,,

¥T¤

S¤S

¤
TT
¥¥
¤S
S


9 Transfer cleaning bias
10 Transfer bias





11 Static eliminator bias
12 Developing bias (AC)
13 Developing bias (DC)
14 Fixing heater (H1)
15 Heat exhaust fan (FM1)
16 Environment heater (H3)
17 Fluorescent lamp heater (H2)
18 Scanner home position
sensor (PS1)
19 Registration sensor (PS6)
20 Separation sensor (PS7)
21 Delivery sensor (PS8)
22 Pick-up clutch (CL2)
23 Registration clutch (CL1)
0

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

5

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

10

15

20

25

30

A-1

B. SIGNALS AND ABBREVIATIONS
1. Signals and Abbreviations
ACBIAS
AE
AEREF
ATTH
BIASS
BPWM
BSHP
BSSLD
C2PUCLD
C2SZ-1
C2SZ-2
C2SZ-3
C2SZ-4
C2PD
C2VPD
C3PD
C3PUCLD
C3SZ-1
C3SZ-2
C3SZ-3
C3SZ-4
C3VPD
CCD
CCDT
CDC
CHSLD
CMA
CMA*
CMB
CMB*
CMD
CPD
CRDOP
CS
CS2
CS3
CSZ-1
CSZ-2
CSZ-3
CSZ-4
DPD
EHTRL
FFA
FFA*
FFB
FFB*
FFCA
FFCB
FFD
FLHT OFF
FL ON
FLPRHT

A-2

DEVELOPING AC BIAS VOLTAGE DETECTION signal
AE SENSOR OUTPUT signal
AE
AE SENSOR REFERENCE signal AE
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE THERMISTOR signal
DEVELOPING DC BIAS VOLTAGE DETECTION signal
DEVELOPING BIAS DRIVE command
BLANKING SHUTTER HOME POSITION signal
BLANKING SHUTTER SOLENOID DRIVE command
CASSETTE2 PICK-UP CLUTCH DRIVE command
CASSETTE2 SIZE signal
CASSETTE2 SIZE signal
CASSETTE2 SIZE signal
CASSETTE2 SIZE signal
CASSETTE2 PAPER DETECTION signal
CASSETTE2 VERTICAL PATH PAPER DETECTION signal
CASSETTE3 PAPER DETECTION signal
CASSETTE3 PICK-UP CLUCTH DRIVE command
CASSETTE3 SIZE signal
CASSETTE3 SIZE signal
CASSETTE3 SIZE signal
CASSETTE3 SIZE signal
CASSETTE3 VERTICAL PATH PAPER DETECTION signal
CONTROL CARD DRIVE command
CONTROL CARD DETECTION signal
COPY DENSITY CORRECTION signal
CHANGE SOLENOID DRIVE command
CASSETTE UNIT MOTOR PULSE command A
CASSETTE UNIT MOTOR PULSE command A*
CASSETTE UNIT MOTOR PULSE command B
CASSETTE UNIT MOTOR PULSE command B
CASSETTE UNIT MOTOR DRIVE command
CASSETTE PAPER DETECTION signal
CASSETTE RIGHT DOOR OPEN signal
CASSETTE SIZE DETECTION command
CASSETTE2 SIZE DETECTION command
CASSETTE3 SIZE DETECTION command
CASSETTE SIZE signal 1
CASSETTE SIZE signal 2
CASSETTE SIZE signal 3
CASSETTE SIZE signal 4
DELIVERY PAPER DETECTION signal
EARTH RL DRIVE command
RL2
FUSER FILM MOTOR PULSE command A
FUSER FILM MOTOR PULSE command A*
FUSER FILM MOTOR PULSE command B
FUSER FILM MOTOR PULSE command
FUSER FILM MOTOR VOLTAGE command A
FUSER FILM MOTOR VOLTAGE command B
FIXING FILM POSITION signal
FLUORESCENT LAMP HETER OFF command
FLUORESCENT LAMP ON command
FLUORESCENT LAMP PRE-HEAT command

FLS
FLTH
FLTH ON
FMD
HEFD
HTNG
HTRD
JCTL
JLVCTL
LHP
LID
LNSA
LNSA*
LNSB
LNSB*
LNSC-A
LNSC-B
MFPD
MFPUCLD
MFPWD
MFSLD
MLOCK
MMCLK
MMD
MPWM
PCLSLD
PDCPWM
PDCS
PEXP
PUCLD
PWSW
RDOP
RGCLD
RPD
SC-A
SC-A*
SC-B
SC-B*
SC-COMA
SC-COMB
SCHP
SPD
SRSW
TCNTD
TEP
TFWON
TFWPWM
TFWS
TH 1
TH 2
TREVON

FLUORESCENT LAMP INTENSITY signal
FLUORESCENT LAMP THERMISTOR signal
FLUORESCENT LAMP HETER ON command
FUSER FILM MOTOR DRIVE command
HEAT EXHAUST FAN DRIVE command
FUSER HEATER NG signal
HEATER DRIVE command
DISCHARGE BIAS DRIVE command
DISCHARGE BIAS CHANGE command
LENS HOME POSITION signal
LIGHT INTENSITY signal
LENS MOTOR PULSE command A
LENS MOTOR PULSE command A*
LENS MOTOR PULSE command B
LENS MOTOR PULSE command B*
LENS MOTOR DRIVE command A
LENS MOTOR DRIVE command B
MULTIFEEDER PAPER DETECTION signal
MULTIFEEDER PICK-UP CLUTCH DRIVE command
MULTIFEEDER PAPER WIDTH DETECTION signal
MULTIFEEDER SOLENOID DRIVE command
MAIN MOTER LOCK signal
MAIN MOTOR CLOCK signal
MAIN MOTER DRIVE command
MAIN PULSE command
PRIMARY CORONA ROLLER CLEANING SOLENOID command
PRIMARY CORONA DETECT PULSE command
PRIMARY CORONA DETECT command
PRE-EXPOSURE LAMP LIT command
PICK-UP CLUTCH DRIVE command
POWER SWITCH command
RIGHT DOOR OPEN signal
REGISTRATION CLUTCH DRIVE command
REGISTRATION PAPER DETECTION signal
SCANNER MOTOR PULSE command A
SCANNER MOTOR PULSE command A*
SCANNER MOTOR PULSE command B
SCANNER MOTOR PULSE command B*
SCANNER MOTOR DRIVE command A
SCANNER MOTOR DRIVE command B
SCANNE HOME POSITION signal
SEPARATION PAPER DETECTION signal
SERVICE MODE SWITCH signal
TOTAL COUNTER DRIVE command
TONER EMPTY signal
TRNSFER BIAS ON/OFF command
TRNSFER BIAS LOW VOLTAGE signal
TRNSFER BIAS PULSE command
FIXING MAIN THERMISTOR signal
FIXING SUB THERMISTOR signal
TRNSFER REVERSE ON command

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

C. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
not available

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

A-3

A-4

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAR. 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

APPENDIX

D. SPECIAL TOOLS
See the table for the special tools used to service the machine in addition to the
standard tools set.
No.
1

Tool name
Door switch
actuator

Tool No.
TKN-0093-000

Shape

Rank

Point of use

Remarks

A

Front door

3

Pulley clip

FY9-3010-000

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

B

For adjusting the
distance between
No. 1 and No. 2
mirrors.

B

For fixing the
scanning cable in
place.

B

A

FY9-3009-040

B

Mirror
positioning tool
(comes in
pairs; front,
rear)

A

2

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

A-5

APPENDIX

E. SOLVENTS/OILS
No.
1

Name
Ethl alcohol
(Ethanol)

Use

Composition
C2 H5 OH

Cleaning:
copyboard glass,
mirror, etc.

(CHZ3)2 CHOH

CH3 • CO • C2H5
Methylethyl ketone

Isopropyl
alcohol
(Isopropanol)

Description
• Flammable.
• Use in a well ventilated
area.
• Avoid breathing
concentrated vapor.

2

MEK

Removing toner
or oil stains

3

Heat-resistant grease

Lubricating the
drive
mechanisms;
e.g., copyboard
driving gear,
fixing drive gear,
fixing ass’y, etc.

4

Lubricating
oil (low
viscosity)

Equivalent oil can be used.
Lubrication points: ISO VG 68 oil
Tool No.: CK-0451 (100cc)
Scanner rail, etc. ESSO Febis K68
MOBIL Vactraoil No. 2
SHELL Tonna oil T68

5

Lubricating
oil (low
viscosity)

Lubrication point:
oneway clutch in
pick-up control
assembly

ISO VG 220 oil
Equivalent oil can be used.
ESSO Febis K220
Tool No.: CK-0524 (100cc).
MOBIL Vactraoil No. 4

6

Lubricating
oil

Lubrication point:
friction parts

Silicone oil

A-6

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

• Flammable.
• Use in a well-ventilated
area and avoid breathing
concentrated vapor.
• Avoid contact with eyes or
skin.
• Do not use for cleaning
the drum, plastic molded
parts, or corona wires.
Tool No.: CK-0427 (500g can)
(Equivqlent grease can be
used, but should be able to
withstand 200°C for
extended periods of time.)

Tool No.: CK-0551 (20g)

CANON NP6218 REV. 0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

Prepared by
OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DEPT. 1
OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DIV.
CANON INC.
Printed in Japan
REVISION 0 (MAY 1997) [31625]
5-1, Hakusan 7-chome, Toride-shi, Ibaraki 302 Japan

This publication is printed on
70% reprocessed paper.
PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON)

0797S0.7-2



---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.5
Linearized                      : No
Creator                         : PSCRIPT.DRV versie 4.0
Modify Date                     : 2004:09:27 23:31:36-03:00
Create Date                     : 1998:02:19 08:48:43Z
About                           : uuid:cef2a184-d184-4948-8521-a1e8295d1ed5
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 3.0 for Power Macintosh
Mod Date                        : 2004:09:27 23:31:36-03:00
Creation Date                   : 1998:02:19 08:48:43Z
Creator Tool                    : PSCRIPT.DRV versie 4.0
Metadata Date                   : 2004:09:27 23:31:36-03:00
Document ID                     : uuid:0e4acbf8-ee69-470b-8c32-e98e3f99b7df
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : ppre.qxd
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 389
Has XFA                         : No

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools